JP6953253B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a gaming ball, which is a gaming medium, is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and when the gaming ball wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the gaming area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a winning ball when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If this is done, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which the hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes are awarded to the large prize openings, the large prize openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control a special state (small hit gaming state) different from an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and to a special state in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased. Some are configured to be controllable. For example, in Patent Document 1, it is possible to control a state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state, and by providing a delay means (regulatory piece) for delaying the flow of the game medium on the special variable winning ball device. , It is described that the winning rate in the small hit game state is increased.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-156952 (paragraph 0042, paragraph 0071-0074, FIG. 2-8)

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the playability in the special state is monotonous, and it cannot be said that the entertainment of the game when controlled in the special state can be sufficiently improved.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the monotonousness of game playability when controlled to a special state and improving the interest of the game.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is in a state different from the advantageous state and is a player. A special state control means that can control a special state that is advantageous to the user, a special state control means that can control a special state that is controlled more frequently to the special state, and a predetermined state that can be easily controlled to the advantageous state. The special state control means includes, as the advantageous state, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state, and the special state control means is provided as the special state. It is possible to control the first special state and the second special state having a higher advantage than the first special state, and in the first special state, the gaming medium is in a specific area as compared with the second special state. When the control is made so as to make it difficult to enter and the second advantageous state is controlled in the predetermined state and the second special state, the predetermined state is reached after the end of the second advantageous state. When controlled to the state of the second special state and controlled to the first advantageous state in the state of the predetermined state and the state of the second special state, the state of not the predetermined state after the end of the first advantageous state. When controlled to the first special state and controlled to the advantageous state in the predetermined state and the second special state, the ratio is higher than that of the first advantageous state. It is characterized in that it is controlled to the second advantageous state.
(Means 1) The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is different from the advantageous state. The special state control means (for example, the part that executes steps S359 to S361 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the special state Special state control means (for example, step S2208A, S2214A, S2218A, S2220A, step S2208B, S2214B, S2218B, S2220B in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) with increased control frequency. The special state control means includes, as special states, a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second special state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is possible to control to the second special state), and when controlling to the first special state, compared to the case of controlling to the second special state, a game medium (for example, a game) is placed in a specific area (for example, a special winning opening 24). The special winning opening 24 is won by controlling the ball) so as to be difficult to enter (for example, by controlling the high base state in the first KT state and controlling the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 to be long. In the case of controlling to the second special state (making it difficult), when the advantageous state is controlled, it is possible to control to the second special state at a high rate after the end of the advantageous state (for example, shown in FIG. 33). As described above, once controlled to the high probability / second KT state, it becomes a probability variation jackpot at a rate of 65% and is controlled to the high probability / second KT state again). According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of playability when controlling to a special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 2) In the means 1, there is a change between an approach advantageous state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or is difficult to enter. It is possible to execute a possible normal variable device (for example, a variable winning ball device 15), a variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol), and a variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Variable display execution means (for example, a portion that executes steps S300 to S304 and S350 to S354 in the game control microcomputer 560) and a plurality of types of control patterns (for example, as shown in FIG. 15, the variable winning ball device 15). With the ordinary variable device control means (for example, the part that executes steps S5103 and S5104 in the game control microcomputer 560) that can control the ordinary variable device by opening for 5.5 seconds and opening for 0.2 seconds). The specific area is usually arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning device (for example, the special variable winning ball device 22 having the special winning opening 24 is arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning ball device 15) and has a variable display. The execution means can simultaneously execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time. When controlled to a special state, it is possible to execute variable display of the second identification information with a shorter variable display period as compared with the case where the special state is not controlled (for example, FIGS. 12 to 14). As shown in, in the KT state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second, 2 seconds, or 5 seconds, which is not selected in the non-KT state, may be selected), and the special state control means is the second. When the variable display of the identification information is executed, it is possible to control the special state at a higher rate than when the variable display of the first identification information is executed (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed). (May be determined as a small hit only if Therefore, the variable device can be normally controlled by a special control pattern for making it difficult for the game medium to flow into a specific region among a plurality of types of control patterns (for example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the variable device is variable. By opening the winning ball device 15 for a long period of 5.5 seconds, it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game playability in which the degree of advantage of the first special state and the degree of advantage of the second special state are different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 3) When the means 1 or the means 2 controls the first special state, the second special state can be controlled based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 9R probability change). Big hit A to C or 6R probability variation When the high probability / 1st KT state is controlled after the big hit game based on big hit A to C, the fluctuation display of 30, 50, or 70 times is displayed without the big hit occurring. When finished, it may be configured to have a high probability / controlled to a second KT state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of playability when controlling to a special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to means 3, a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, The 2R normal jackpot) is provided with controllable advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S306 to S308 and S356 to S358 in the game control microcomputer 560), and the special state control means is controlled to the second special state. In this case, when a specific type of advantageous state (for example, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C) is controlled, it is possible to control to the second special state after the advantageous state is terminated. (For example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C and the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C are reached in the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT state is controlled again). You may. According to such a configuration, once controlled to the second special state, it becomes easy to be repeatedly controlled to the second special state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 5) In the means 4, the special state control means is controlled to a specific kind of advantageous state (for example, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C) when the first special state is controlled. In this case, it is possible to control the first special state after the advantageous state is completed (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, 9R probability variation jackpots A to C and 6R probability variation jackpots A to C in the high probability / first KT state. Then, when it is controlled to a high probability / first KT state again), and when it is controlled to a special kind of advantageous state (for example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) in the case of controlling to the first special state, After finishing the advantageous state, it is possible to control to the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached in the high probability / first KT state, the probability / second KT state is reached. It may be configured to be controlled). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give intonation to the game playability, and it is possible to pay attention to the type of advantageous state that occurs when the game is controlled to the first special state, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be done.

(Means 6) In the means 4 or the means 5, a predetermined state control means (for example, step S2207A in the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a probabilistic state (high probability state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state. , S2212A, S2217A, S2207B, S2212B, S2217B), and the special state control means has a predetermined type of advantageous state (for example, 6R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) when controlling to the second special state. ), It is possible to control to the first special state which is not controlled to the predetermined state after ending the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, 6R normal jackpot in the high probability / second KT state. When it becomes a 2R normal jackpot, it may be configured to have a low probability / controlled to the first KT state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give anxiety to the player that he / she may be pulled back to a disadvantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for passing through the 1st gate. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal design normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the ordinary symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which a microcomputer for production control executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a confirmation command. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the instruction notification control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the demo display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the background symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end effect processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit middle processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display example in the effect display apparatus in a high probability / 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display example in the effect display apparatus in a high probability / 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display example of right-handed display in a high probability / 2nd KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display example of the full tank error notification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example of instruction notification in this embodiment. It is a timing chart when the jackpot game state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display processing in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in the modification. It is a timing chart for explaining the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state in the modified example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 1 as viewed from the front. Here, a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and is, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like. May be good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 13). Satisfaction of the display area (hereinafter referred to as the first variable display unit 9a) for variably displaying the decorative symbol for production (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying the display result, and the second start condition which is the second execution condition. A display area in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified based on (for example, the hit ball has won the second start winning opening 14) are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. (Hereinafter referred to as a second variable display unit 9b) and a display area (hereinafter, a background symbol) in which it is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b. There is a display unit 9c). It should be noted that the fact that the display contents are easy to visually recognize means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or that the display contents in the variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the background symbol effect unit 9c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as a background symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. The winning is that the game ball enters an area that is predetermined as a winning area such as a winning opening. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol is stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect unit 9c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 9a and second variable display unit 9b), and the background symbol effect unit 9c has 2 Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed in the two variable display units is executed, whether the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. It is difficult to grasp (whether or not). In addition, in this embodiment, the background symbol is for performing the symbol variation display for the effect on the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the effect identification information, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. ..

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 for effect that can operate so as to cover a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 is operated by driving the movable member motor 78a by the effect control microcomputer 200. Further, on the left side of the effect display device 9, an origin position sensor 78b for detecting that the movable member 78 is at the origin position is also provided.

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first holding storages (holding storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a performs variable display of a decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a. Further, the second variable display unit 9b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that perform variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 18c) for displaying the total number (total number of hold storages) which is the total of the above. As described above, in this embodiment, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 18c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see the total. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 18a and the second special symbol holding storage display 18b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, respectively. Although it is configured, in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an indicator of another aspect may be used. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage display 18a and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b are each composed of one display, the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages, is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, out of the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 18c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 when the number of first reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first valid starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 when the number of second reserved memories is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 13a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 32 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, an operating gate 17 is provided below the gate 32. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 17 is detected by the actuating gate switch 17a.

Below the operating gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning opening 24 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 are provided. As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 15 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also referred to as the open state) in which the game ball can win in the special winning opening 24 and the second starting winning opening 14 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 22 moves the bottom member forward in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 24, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, when the variable winning ball device 15 hits the normal symbol display 10 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 14 which is the winning area is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 The special variable winning ball device 22 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 22. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 7 is dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 15, but at this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 14 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 24. Further, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 22 and falls toward the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 15 is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 15 is used to perform a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 24 is provided in the special winning opening 24. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening 24 opened in the special variable winning ball device 22, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins in the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 24 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 14, a second starting opening switch 14a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 14 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 14a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the special variable winning ball device 20 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning opening 14), and the special variable winning ball device 22 (special). Since the winning opening 24) is provided on the right side of the game area 7, when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state described later, the player aims at the right side of the game area 7 and launches (so-called right). Perform the striking operation).

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required from the game ball passing through the gate 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is set to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 32, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the gate 32, and in the first KT state described later, the game ball is the gate 32. The time from passing through to the variable winning ball device 15 being controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the gate 32 in the first KT state, the one game ball is released. It is possible to win the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14). Changes to. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Decorative lamps 25 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, and an out port 26 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 7. Top frame lamps 28a, left frame lamps 28b, and right frame lamps 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 7. Further, a prize ball lamp 51 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball burnout lamp 52 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. It is provided.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 7 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 5, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display unit 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the variable display unit 9a. It will be started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second variable display unit 9b starts the second decorative symbol. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 18c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the big hit game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time elapses after the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). A V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the right to continue may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 2-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 8a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a big hit symbol also increases. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the first start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the second starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also the probability of becoming a jackpot symbol increases. The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a becomes a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in the present embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long, and small hits are made. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is shortened.

The probabilistic state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, while the first special symbol may not be determined as a small hit when the first special symbol fluctuates, it may be determined as a small hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, the compulsion described later). Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b are synchronized with each other. Here, synchronization means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display unit 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right background symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, although there are exceptions as described later, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived on the background symbol display unit 9c. It is displayed (the background symbol is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). Three background patterns with the middle and right sides aligned). Hereinafter, such a background symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the background symbol is variably displayed in the three display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. An effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of a background symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped background symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three background symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the background symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the background symbol display unit 9c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbol (for example, background). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 9c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, during reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the background pattern display unit 9c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the background symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the background symbol display unit 9c (the background color or pattern different from the symbol and the character) can be displayed. The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2 to 4 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 22. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 22 is described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 22, and the variable winning ball device 22 is used. The structure of the ball device 15 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 22 is fixedly supported in the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 101, a special winning opening 24 (second starting winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 24, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom surface member 23 on the back surface side (rear side) of the game area 7 when the bottom surface member 23 moves backward. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right side of the base plate portion 101.

The bottom member 23 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right is allowed to flow down to the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the slope of the bottom member 23. It is formed to do. The bottom surface member 23 can be moved forward and backward between the state of being moved forward as shown in FIG. 3 and the state of being moved backward as shown in FIG. 4, and the bottom surface member 23 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 23 in this state, and the upstream flow path portion 113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 23, A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 23, and a downstream flow path portion 114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 23 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 23, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base portion 112 is recessed downward from the end portion of the upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 on the bottom surface member 23 side, and the special winning openings 24 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 115 for guiding the game ball that has fallen below the bottom surface member 23 to the special winning opening 24 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 23 from below.

The upstream side flow path portion 113 and the downstream side flow path portion 114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so that the game ball flows down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 24 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115, a triangular guide portion 116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 24 side (back side of the game area 7) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112. Has been done. The covering portion 117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 113, the downstream side flow path portion 114, and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow paths portions bounces toward the glass door frame 4. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 22, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, which is composed of an upstream side flow path portion 113, a bottom surface member 23, and a downstream side flow path portion 114, between the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Road F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 118 for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F are formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117.

In the present embodiment, the regulation piece 118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 118 are formed so as to be arranged at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the regulation piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 23, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 is formed. One regulation piece 118 is formed at a portion that covers the 114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 that covers the bottom surface member 23, a total of five regulation pieces 118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the regulation piece 118 is covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 (and the variable winning ball device 15 having the same configuration) of the present embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which the bottom surface member 23 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base portion 112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (or the second starting winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 5 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputer mounted on the substrate other than the main substrate 31.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560. The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and game control controls the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22, and the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15. An output circuit 59 that is driven according to a command from the computer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control computer 560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board 31 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the gaming machine.

In this embodiment, the payout control means (consisting of a payout control microcomputer (not shown)) mounted on the payout control board 37 is a payout control command (for example, a payout control command (for example) from the game control microcomputer 560). , A command for specifying the number of prize balls to specify the number of prize balls) is received, and the ball payout device 97 is driven to control the payout of prize balls. Further, for example, a full tank switch 48 for detecting that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is in a full tank state is connected to the payout control board 37, and the payout control means is from the full tank switch 48. When the detection signal is input, a payout control command (full tank detection designation command) indicating that the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is in the full tank state is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 560.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c that variably displays the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 202 and the input port 203. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 6 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 204b. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the input / output port 204a.

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a drive signal to the movable member motor 78a via the input / output port 204c to operate the movable member 78. Further, the effect control CPU 201 inputs a detection signal from the origin position sensor 78b via the input / output port 204c.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to the decorative lamp 25 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 22, and the lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the phone number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the telephone number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the voice in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (a response signal is transmitted from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, and the like (including decorative symbols and background symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 201.

In this embodiment, a VDP 209 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP 209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 70 and the lamp shown in FIG. 6). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via the driver board 35 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S4). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode shown.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is a backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 56 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S91 and S92, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 in the pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc. is one round (random number generation counter for jackpot determination, etc.). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the operating gate switch 17a are input via the input driver circuit 58. , The state determination is performed (switch processing: step S21).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage display 18a, and the second special symbol hold storage display 18b. Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether to generate a big hit or whether to generate a small hit (for big hit judgment)
(2) Random 2: Determine which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5: Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit).
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for determining the initial value of random 1)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is used for (1) a random number for determining a jackpot, (2) a random number for determining a jackpot type, and (4) for determining a normal symbol hit. The counter for generating random numbers is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in the present embodiment, a common random number (random number 2) is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. You may.

Further, the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process (step S26A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol process process (step S26C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs the hold storage process (step S27). In the hold storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 informs the output port of the contents related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S32). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

Further, the CPU 56 performs an error notification process for controlling the error notification (step S34). In step S34, for example, when the CPU 56 receives the full tank detection designation command from the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 37, the effect display device 9 displays the full tank error notification. Control is performed to send a full tank error notification designation command to the control microcomputer 200. In addition, when the full tank detection designation command is not received from the payout control means after the display of the full tank error notification is started (when the full tank state of the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is resolved). , CPU 56 controls to transmit a full tank error release designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, but the CPU 56 uses the CPU 56. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in (probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 10 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. A numerical value is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 10A is the jackpot determination value.

FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. Each numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is set in the small hit determination table. Further, the numerical value shown in FIG. 10B is a small hit determination value.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, the small hit determination process (see step S162B) may be performed only when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, resulting in a small hit, and the KT state. Since the right-handed operation is performed, the frequency of executing the variable display of the second special symbol is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the KT state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the big hit game state.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 10 (A). If any of the jackpot judgment values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for determining the big hit matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 10 (B), it is determined to make a small hit with respect to the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 10A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIG. 10B indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the probability (ratio) of a small hit is set to be 122/487, and is set to be approximately 1/4. There is. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether or not to make the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 8b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. In addition, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, a lottery process using the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 10B is performed, and the lottery process is performed to be about 1/4. It is decided to make a small hit with a probability (however, as will be described later, it may be a forced loss).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b set the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. "2R probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot A", "6R probability variation jackpot B", "6R probability variation jackpot C", "9R probability variation jackpot A", "9R probability variation jackpot B", "9R probability variation jackpot B" It is a table referred to for determining either "big hit C" or "16R probability variation big hit".

As shown in FIG. 11A, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, it is determined with a probability of 9% that it is a "16R probability variation jackpot", and there is a probability of 19% that it is "16R probability variation jackpot". 6R probability variation jackpot A is determined, 19% probability is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot B", 18% probability is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot C", and 35% probability is "6R normal jackpot". It is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 11B, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 10%, and the probability of 17%. Is determined as "9R probability variation jackpot A", 17% probability is determined as "9R probability variation jackpot B", 16% probability is determined as "9R probability variation jackpot C", and 5% probability is "2R probability variation jackpot B". Is determined, and there is a 35% chance that it will be determined as a "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, "9R probability variation jackpot A" to "9R probability variation jackpot C" are jackpots that are controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 9 rounds and are shifted to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, "6R probability variation jackpot A" to "6R probability variation jackpot C" are jackpots that are controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shift to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, when "16R probability variation jackpot", "9R probability variation jackpot A" to "9R probability variation jackpot C", "6R probability variation jackpot A" to "6R probability variation jackpot C", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained. Is controlled so that the jackpot is open until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won. It is possible to win up to 10 large winning openings in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes in the large prize openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 33).

Hereinafter, when "9R probability variation jackpot A", "9R probability variation jackpot B" and "9R probability variation jackpot C" are comprehensively expressed, they are also simply referred to as "9R probability variation jackpot". Further, hereinafter, when "6R probability variation jackpot A", "6R probability variation jackpot B" and "6R probability variation jackpot C" are comprehensively expressed, they are also simply referred to as "6R probability variation jackpot".

12 to 14 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. 32 types of # 01 to # 32 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or 01 to 32) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 12 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12A, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 12B The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 13 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variation display is reduced. By doing so, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and the situation where a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball is prevented even though the player is in a non-KT state. In this embodiment, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even if it is a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 13 (D), when it is determined that the first variation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds is determined. NS. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. Fluctuation pattern for preparation) is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 24 in the ball device 22 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 22 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 24. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 24. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed, FIG. 13 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 13 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13. Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 07 of the shortened fluctuation or , The second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second, may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of range, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 9 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!" The second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first configuration). If the gaming machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 9R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be done.

As in the case of the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), the fluctuation time is 5 seconds even when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state is out of order. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the short shortening fluctuation. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of order, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 9R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 14 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 14 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 is applied. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, the fluctuation time May be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second variation or later in the high probability / first KT state is out of range, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 32.

As shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 25 of the shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds. There is. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 31 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 32 with reach is determined.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. 15 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 15 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 22 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (1). As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the missing symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. Will be. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be opened only after the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 0.1 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, has elapsed. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, has passed, the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually in the state where the symbol is not changed. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is shorter than the time when the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is already in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 when it is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (2). As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 executes a variable display of the normal symbol, and hits the normal symbol. If it is determined that the symbol is out of line, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10, and if it is determined to be off, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 second. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for a game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 22 of the above, and it is easy for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 24.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, it is normal that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 2.6 seconds, has passed, and the game ball is gated. The time required from passing through 32 to reaching the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state is usually longer in the state where the normal symbol is not changed. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the gate 32 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 is longer than the time when the symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state. The game ball will reach the variable winning ball device 15 before it is played. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the gate 32 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56). This is done by executing (see step S26C). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S26C, depending on whether it is in the KT state or the normal state. Whether or not to hit the normal figure is determined by different probabilities (for example, 10/11 in the KT state and 1/11 in the normal state). The same probability regardless of whether the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. (For example, 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to make a normal figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 is made different by making it as short as 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and as long as 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 15 is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to shorten the closing period (interval period) in the first KT state by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. can.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 15 (1). , The variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the opening time is long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled so that the opening time is shortened as shown in FIG. 15 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. ..

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning is as shown in FIG. 15 (1). A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 15 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. 15 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening). That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, in the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 15 being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

As described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 15, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the gate 32 The variable winning ball device 15 does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through the above reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning opening 24 can be won.) On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened after the game ball passes through the gate 32 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to start, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

16 and 17 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H) correspond to the variable display of the special symbol and correspond to the variable display of the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 9b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8030 (H), the first variable display unit 9a or the second variable display unit 9b Controls to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation jackpot A. Is. Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (9R probability variation jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation jackpot B. Is. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation jackpot C (display result 5 designation command (9R probability variation jackpot C designation command)). Is. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation jackpot A. Is. Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation jackpot B (display result 7 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot B designation command)). Is. The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation jackpot C. Is. The command 9009 (H) is an effect control command (display result 9 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 900A (H) is an effect control command (display result 10 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 900B (H) is an effect control command (display result 11 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 900C (H) is an effect control command (display result 12 designation command (small hit designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 12 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the effect control microcomputer 200 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 does not send a display result specification command, but 15R probability variation jackpot / 9R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined in correspondence with the above, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command EE00 (H) is an effect control command (full tank error notification designation command) that specifies that the full tank error notification is displayed. The command EE01 (H) is an effect control command (full tank error release designation command) that specifies to cancel the display of the full tank error notification.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 13 provided on the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting opening winning opening 13 (step S311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S312). After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S300 to S308 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S300 to S308 are as follows.

First special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

First gate passage waiting process (step S305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball through the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (5 in this example).

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Preprocessing (Step S306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the grand prize opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S308): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a high base flag, and a KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting the first reserved storage number). (Whether or not is 4) is confirmed (step S212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passing process is terminated as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S213), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20) (step S215). .. In the process of step S215, the software random numbers for jackpot determination (random 1), jackpot type determination random numbers (random 2), and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers (random 5) are extracted and stored in the storage area. .. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 5) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do so. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) in the first variation pattern setting process described later. You may.

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 20, in the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number (random 1), the jackpot type determination random number (random 2), and the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5) are stored in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Will be done. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

Further, the control is performed to transmit the first effective start winning command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S216).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S300) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300, it means that the first special symbol display 8a is not displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and This is the case even during the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed.

If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. (Step S53A), the value of the first reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the first reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S55A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. In some cases, it is determined that it is in the low probability / first KT state, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. Judge and issue the high probability / 1st KT background specification command, and if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, determine that it is in the high probability / 2nd KT state and issue the high probability / 2nd KT background specification command. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S56A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S66A without performing the processing after step S57A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S56A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S58A. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, in the gaming machine that performs the small hit determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit separately from the big hit determination, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S56A, steps S57A to S62A. A random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range is set as a random number for small hit judgment (a random number common to the random number for big hit judgment or a completely different random number) without performing the processing of. By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S57A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S58A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S59A), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step S60A). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot A to 6R probability variation jackpot C, or 6R normal jackpot (step S61A), and the jackpot type is stored (step S62A). , Step S66A. Further, if the jackpot is not achieved in step S59A (that is, if it is missed), the process proceeds to step S66A.

In this embodiment, when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it is unconditionally determined to be all out of order, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, even if the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be determined to be a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S66A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S66A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S66A is determined.

In step S58A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S302) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms whether or not the KT flag indicating the KT state is set (step S1700). If the KT flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 is used as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern for non-KT, as shown in FIG. 12 (A). The first special symbol variation pattern table is selected (step S1701). If the KT flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern as the variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 12 (B). 1 Select the variation pattern table for special symbols (step S1702).

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a variation pattern table determined to be used in steps S1701 and S1702, and a variation pattern determination random number (random number 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 should be used (step S1703). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1704).

Further, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1703, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step S1705), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1706). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1707).

In the first display result designation command transmission process (step S302), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) is based on the determination result of whether or not to make a big hit and the determination result of the big hit type. Control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 6 designation command to display result 9 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol changing process (step S303) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step S1122A), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 200. Control to transmit the designated command (step S1123A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). , The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1124A).

By executing the processes of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the first special symbol Is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the first variable display unit 9a in the first variable display unit 9a is based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. 1 The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and the display result 1 designated command transmitted in step S302 is used to control the stop display of the out-of-order symbol as a variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 29, the first start port switch passage process is performed for each timer interrupt (see step S312). And the second start port switch passing process (see step S322) is executed. Therefore, even if the stop display of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being displayed, if a new start prize is generated, a new start prize is generated. It is configured to store new hold memory.

If the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step S2010), and if it is "0". , Step S2016. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step S2011) and becomes "0". It is determined whether or not (step S2012). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S2016. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the CPU 56 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step S2013). Further, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step S2014). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S2016. If the probability change state is not set, the CPU 56 resets the KT flag indicating the KT state (step S2015).

In this embodiment, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High probability when controlled to a high base state (low probability / 1st KT state) and 50 fluctuation displays are executed, and at the end of a jackpot game based on 9R probability variation jackpots A to C and 6R probability variation jackpots A to C / The variation display may be executed 30 times, 50 times, or 70 times under the control of a high base state (high probability / first KT state). In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th fluctuation display is completed, it is determined as Y in step S2012, the high base flag is reset in step S2013, and the step It is determined to be N in S2014, the KT flag is also reset in step S2015, and the state shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)). Further, in the case of a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), when the 30th, 50th, or 70th variation display is completed, it is determined as Y in step S2012 and the high base is determined in step S2013. Only the flag is reset, it is determined as Y in step S2014, the KT flag is not reset, and the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

In step S2016, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step S2016). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set if it is set (step S2017). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the probability change storage flag indicating that the probability change state was controlled before the start of the big hit (step S2018). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base flag is set (step S2019). If the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 sets the high base storage flag indicating that the high base state was controlled before the start of the big hit (step S2020). Then, if set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the KT flag high base count counter (step S2021).

Next, the CPU 56 sets the timer before opening the big winning opening (step S2022), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2023), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". (Step S2024), and set the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process of waiting for the passage of the first gate (step S2025).

When the first jackpot flag is not set (N in step S2016), the CPU 56 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S2026).

Although the details will be described later, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area 7 can be executed. .. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, as a right-handed notification, a firing promotion notification for urging the player to launch the game ball aiming at the operating gate 17 can be executed.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or low volume). The screen display) may be configured to give a left-handed notification to the player to urge the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a loud sound). It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, according to the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area 7 is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. Therefore, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operating gate 17, the second starting winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a certain number, a left-handed notification is performed. May be good. Further, at the gate 32 and the operating gate 17, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening 14 and the special winning opening 14 and the special winning opening In 24, when a specific number (for example, one) or more of game balls, which is less than a predetermined number, is detected, left-handed notification may be performed.

Further, for example, the detection of the game ball at the gate 32 or the operating gate 17 does not output an external signal, while the detection of the game ball at the second starting winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 outputs an external signal. It may be configured to do so.

In the present embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning opening 14 or the second start winning opening 14 or When the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24 is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process (step S305) in the special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operating gate switch 17a has been input (step S2501). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56 transmits the first big hit start designation command (step S2502), and sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first big winning opening pre-opening process. Set to the corresponding value (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is not started as soon as the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol by executing the first gate passage waiting process, but the operating gate 17 The game is configured to shift to a big hit game on condition that the game ball passes through the game and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the first large winning opening pre-opening process (step S306) in the special symbol process process. In the first large winning opening pre-opening process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the large winning opening pre-opening timer by -1 (step S1401). If it is before the start of round 1, the process of step S1401 is executed, so that the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in step S2022 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. , The jackpot display time (fanfare period) before the start of Round 1 will be measured. Further, in the case of round 1 or later, the process of step S1401 is executed, and the value of the timer before opening the large winning opening set in the processing during opening of the large winning opening is measured, so that after each round ( The interval period (except after the final round) will be measured.

In this embodiment, the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer, but the jackpot display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separated. It may be configured to measure the time using the timer of.

Next, when the CPU 56 sets the current number of rounds in the EXT data of the designated command during opening of the large winning opening when the timer before opening the large winning opening times out (the value of the time measurement timer is 0) (step S1411). , Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes the winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the large winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the large winning opening to be in the open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the jackpot type and the starting round in the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S307) (step S1416).

27 and 28 are flowcharts showing the first big hit end process (step S308) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the first jackpot flag is reset (step S2201A), and control is performed to transmit the first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S2203A), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability change jackpot, the CPU 56 sets a probability change flag indicating that it is in a probability change state and shifts to a probability change state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and sets a KT flag indicating that it is in a KT state. Then, the state shifts to the KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2222A. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

If it is not a 16R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot A to C (step S2209A). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C can be determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal processing. If the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step S2210A). If the probability variation storage flag is set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step S2211A). If the high base storage flag is set (that is, if there is a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2212A. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if there is a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2217A. If the probability variation flag is not set (N in step S2210A), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step S2216A). If the high-base storage flag is set (that is, if there is a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2217A. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if there is a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2212A. Therefore, in this case, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2211A) or low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (N in step S2216A) ), The CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2212A), sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2213A), and further shifts to the high base state (step S2213A). Is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214A). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state to "30", "50" or "70" depending on which of the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C is the type of jackpot that has ended this time. Is set (step S2215A). In this case, if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot A, "30" is set in the high base number counter, and if it is a 6R probability variation jackpot B, "50" is set in the high base frequency counter, and the 6R probability variation jackpot is set. If it is C, "70" is set in the high base count counter. It should be noted that which of the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S62A of the first special symbol normal processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S2222A.

High probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (N in step S2211A) or low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2216A) The CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2217A), and sets the KT flag and shifts to the KT state (step S2218A). Therefore, in this case, since the high base flag is not set, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Then, the process proceeds to step S2222A.

If it is not the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C (that is, if it is the 6R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219A), and sets the KT flag to the KT state. (Step S2220A). Further, the CPU 56 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step S2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2222A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

The CPU 56 then resets the probability variation storage flag and the high base storage flag, if set (step S2222A). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S2223A).

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 provided in the game board 6 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting opening winning opening 14 (step S321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 56 performs any of steps S350 to S361 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S350 to S361 are as follows.

Second special symbol normal process (step S350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. If it is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit. If it is a small hit, set the small hit flag. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S355 (5 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S359 (9 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when it is set to be off (including the case where it is forced to be off)), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) corresponds to step S350. Update to the value (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S22.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the operating gate 17. When the passage of the game ball to the operating gate 17 is detected, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example).

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. In the second large winning opening pre-opening process, the special variable winning ball device 20 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 20) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S357 (7 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20, and the like are performed. Further, when the game ball wins the prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, the control is performed to transmit the grand prize opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S356 (6 in this example). do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S358 (8 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a high base flag, and a KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release preprocessing (step S359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 24) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 22 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S360 (10 (decimal number) in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting a small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 22 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 has elapsed by 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when the game ball wins the special winning opening and the second count switch 25a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S361 (11 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S361): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process (step S350) in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. When the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350, it means that the second special symbol display 8b is not displaying the variation of the second special symbol, and This is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed.

If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55, and the RAM 55. In addition to storing in the second random number buffer area of (step S53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 55 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

After that, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S55B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step S55A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S56B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S66B without performing the processing after step S57B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

It should be noted that the method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S56B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the range as a random number for jackpot determination (random 1) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S58B. Regardless of which big hit determination random number (random number 1) was acquired at the time of starting winning, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S56B, the small hit determination random number (a random number common to the big hit determination random number may be used without performing the processes of steps S57B to S62B. , It may be a completely different random number) By setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of the question and performing a small hit judgment, which big hit judgment random number (random 1) was acquired at the time of starting prize Regardless, it may be forcibly removed.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 560 reads the jackpot determination random number (random number 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S57B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step). S58B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for jackpot determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step S59B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S60B). .. Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot A to 9R probability variation jackpot C, 2R probability variation jackpot, or 2R normal jackpot (step S61B), and the jackpot type is stored. (Step S62B), the process proceeds to step S66B.

If the big hit is not made in step S59B, the game control microcomputer 560 executes the small hit determination module (step S63B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit determination random number (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value to be a small hit. When it is decided to make a small hit (step S64B), the game control microcomputer 560 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step S65B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S66B.

Then, in step S66B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S66B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step S66B is determined.

In step S58B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 first performs the same process as in step S1700 to confirm whether or not the KT flag is set. If the KT flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 is used as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern for non-KT time shown in FIG. 13 (C). Select the second special symbol variation pattern table. If the KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 560 sets the fluctuation pattern according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determination, any one of the variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 13 (D) to 14 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (D) is selected for the first variation. Then, if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (E) is selected, and if it is the 50th variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (F) is selected. Select. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 14 (G). Is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 14 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 14 (I) is selected.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit, and a decision result of the big hit type. Based on this, control is performed to send one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command, display result 10 designation command to display result 12 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200. ..

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is the same as the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. 23. That is, in the first special symbol changing process shown in FIG. 23, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol changing process is explained.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S355) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S305) shown in FIG. 25. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, if "first" is read as "second", the second gate passage waiting process is explained.

The second large winning opening pre-opening process (step S356) is the same as the first large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) shown in FIG. 26. That is, in the first large winning opening pre-opening process shown in FIG. 26, if "first" is read as "second", the second large winning opening pre-opening process is explained.

31 and 32 are flowcharts showing the second big hit end process (step S358) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the second jackpot flag is reset (step S2201B), and control is performed to transmit the second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 is set in the big hit end display timer (step S2203B), and the process is terminated.

In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B), and sets the KT flag to shift to the KT state (step S2208B). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S2222B. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set, so that the control is performed in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 16R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is 9R probability variation jackpot A to C (step S2209B). Whether or not the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C can be determined can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the probability variation storage flag is set (step S2210B). If the probability variation storage flag is set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step S2211B). If the high base storage flag is set (that is, if there is a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2212B. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if there is a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2217B. If the probability change flag is not set (N in step S2210B), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high base storage flag is set (step S2216B). If the high-base storage flag is set (that is, if there is a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2217B. If the high base storage flag is not set (that is, if there is a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) before the start of the jackpot), the process proceeds to step S2212B. Therefore, in this case, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

High probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2211B) or low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (N in step S2216B) ), The CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2212B), sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2213B), and further shifts to the high base state (step S2213B). Is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “30”, “50” or “70” in the high base number counter according to which of the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C is the jackpot type completed this time (step S2215B). In this case, if it is a 9R probability variation jackpot A, "30" is set in the high base number counter, and if it is a 9R probability variation jackpot B, "50" is set in the high base frequency counter, and the 9R probability variation jackpot is set. If it is C, "70" is set in the high base number counter. It should be noted that which of the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S62B of the second special symbol normal processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S2222B.

High probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (N in step S2211B) or low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) (Y in step S2216B) The CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step S2217B), and sets the KT flag and shifts to the KT state (step S2218B). Therefore, in this case, since the high base flag is not set, it is controlled to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Then, the process proceeds to step S2222B.

If it is not 9R probability variation jackpot A to C (that is, if it is 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219A), and sets the KT flag to the KT state. (Step S2220B). Further, the CPU 56 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step S2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2222B. Therefore, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Next, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation storage flag and the high-base storage flag, if set (step S2222B). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S350) (step S2223B).

Here, the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in this embodiment. First, in this embodiment, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 7. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot A to C, or a 6R normal jackpot occurs mainly. do.

As shown in FIG. 33, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs in the low probability / low base state, it shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and then the next The high probability / low base state is maintained until a jackpot occurs (see steps S2206A-S2208A). In addition, when 6R probability variation big hits A to C occur in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit is made. The high probability / high base state is maintained until it occurs or the variable display of the number of times according to the jackpot type is completed (see steps S2209A, N of S2210A, N of S2216A, and S2212A to S2215A). In this case, if the 6R probability variation jackpot A is used, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the 30th variation display is completed, and if the 6R probability variation jackpot B is used, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed. The state is maintained, and if the 6R probability variation jackpot C is used, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 70 times is completed. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs? The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps S2219A to S2221A).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the player moves to the right of the game area 7. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 16R probability variation jackpot, a 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot occurs mainly. do.

As shown in FIG. 33, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a high probability / low base state (high) after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, when 9R probability variation jackpots A to C occur in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game. The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variation display of the number of times according to the big hit type is completed (see steps S2209B, S2210B N, S2216B N, S2212B to S2215B). ). In this case, if the 9R probability variation jackpot A is used, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the 30th variation display is completed, and if the 9R probability variation jackpot B is used, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed. The state is maintained, and if the 9R probability variation jackpot C is used, the high probability / high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 70 times is completed. In this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 9R probability variation jackpot A to C is 50% in total (see FIG. 11), so that the probability is once high / In the high base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, after 6R probability variation jackpots A to C and 9R probability variation jackpots A to C occur and the probability / high base state is reached, the fluctuation display of 30 times, 50 times, or 70 times without the occurrence of the next jackpot. When is completed, as shown in FIG. 33, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) (see Y in steps S2010 to S2013 and S2014). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

As shown in FIG. 33, in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), even if any of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, and the 2R probability variation jackpot occurs. After the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps S2206B to S2208B, steps S2209B). , S of S2210B, Y of S2216B, S2217B to S2218B). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B). In this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIG. 11), so once the probability becomes low / high base state. A low probability / high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. When a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, as shown in FIG. 33. In addition, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps S2010 to S2013, N and S2015 in S2014).

As shown in FIG. 33, in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), even if any of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, and the 2R probability variation jackpot occurs. After the jackpot game ends, the game shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (steps S2206B to S2208B, steps S2209B). , S of S2210B, N of S2211B, S2217B to S2218B). In this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 9R probability variation jackpot AC, and the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, Since the probability of a 2R probability variation jackpot is 65% in total (see FIG. 11), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 65%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

In addition, in FIG. 33, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed at a low rate. It could be done. In this case, when a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when 9R probability variation big hits A to C occur, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and whether the next big hit occurs 30 times or 50 times depending on the big hit type. , Or the high probability / high base state will be maintained until the 70th variation display is completed. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-fold fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 33, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that it will be done. In this case, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when 6R probability variation big hits A to C occur, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and whether the next big hit occurs 30 times or 50 times depending on the big hit type. , Or the high probability / high base state will be maintained until the 70th variation display is completed. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 33, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that it will be done. In this case, when any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 33, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is executed at a low rate. It is possible that it will be done. In this case, when any one of the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the 50-time fluctuation display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the process during special symbol change is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the processing during special symbol change is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing the variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. After that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. Since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is set in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. Further, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol changing process), the special symbol variation display is used. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a discrepancy between the fluctuation time recognized by the game control microcomputer 560 and the fluctuation time recognized by the effect control microcomputer 200, the display result designation command transmission process also fluctuates. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by 1.

In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the change of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and is based on the fact that the end flag is set. It is also possible to set special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol.

Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of ordinary symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111), the gate The switch passage process (step S5112) is executed. Then, the CPU 56 executes any of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passing process (step S5112): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the count value (gate passing storage number) of the gate passing storage counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of extracting the value of the normal symbol hit determination random number (random 4) and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): When the CPU 56 is in a state where the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 10 does not display the variation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 15 is not in the opening / closing operation based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gates is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if so, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step S5103): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operating time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the number of gate passing memories is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing storage number counter (step S5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing storage number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing storage number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the gate passing memory counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the KT flag is set (step S5124). If the KT flag is set (that is, the KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state)), the normal symbol for KT is used as a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol. The determination table is selected (step S5125). If the KT flag is not set (that is, the normal state (non-KT state)), the normal normal symbol determination table is selected as the normal symbol determination table (step S5126).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the ordinary symbol determination table selected in steps S5125 and S5126, and determines whether or not to hit the ordinary symbol (step S5127).

FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a normal symbol hit judgment value to be compared with a normal symbol hit judgment random number (random 4) is set, and is in a normal state. There is a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state and a normal symbol determination table for KT used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, it is determined that the probability of winning is 1/10 in the normal state and 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, since the probability of hitting a normal symbol differs between the normal state and the KT state, the KT state is more likely to generate a start prize to the second start winning opening 14 than the normal state. Although the configuration is such that small hits are likely to occur, the probability of hitting a normal symbol may be the same in the normal state and the KT state.

Specifically, in step S5127, if the CPU 56 is in the KT state, the normal symbol hit determination random value read in step S5122 using the KT ordinary symbol determination table is within the range of [3 to 12]. If it is in the normal state, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination random value read in step S5122 is [3] using the normal normal symbol determination table. do. If it is a hit, a hit symbol is set as a display result (step S5128), and the process proceeds to step S5130.

Further, in step S5127, if the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range, the CPU 56 sets the outlier symbol as the display result (step S5129), and proceeds to step S5130.

In step S5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5131 in step S5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5132 in step S5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5133).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S5141), the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S5144).

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time on the normal symbol process timer. Set the value (step S5142). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hits in step S5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step S3708).

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). ..

Next, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step S5103) (step S3707).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3803). , That is, in the case of the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S625). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step S624).

As described above, in the present embodiment, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening 14 than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 may be set to 2 times in the first KT state, whereas the number of times of opening of 15 is set to 1). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening 14.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 shown above and the variable winning ball device 15 as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with a control that increases the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104) (step S3807).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory operation process (step S5104). In the normal electric accessory operation process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3901). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3901), the process ends as it is.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer times out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 16 is stopped to close the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step S5100) (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, an initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like (step S701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 201 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 9a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 9b is executed. .. Further, a background symbol process process for controlling the display state of the background symbol display unit 9c is executed (step S706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is executed (step S707). Further, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S708). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed. The interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

44 to 47 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 12 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation specification command has been normally received. After that, the effect control CPU 201 executes the process at the time of receiving the confirmation command (step S621).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S622), the effect control CPU 201 has the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag. Is set (step S623). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S623 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S624). The instruction notification is an effect of notifying how to hit the game ball, the first instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7, and the second instruction notification for prompting the launch of the game ball to the operating gate 17. Instruction notification is provided. The first instruction notification includes the first normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters "right-handed" on the entire surface of the effect display device 9, and "right-handed" on a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9. A second reduction instruction notification that displays an image containing the characters "" is provided, and as a second instruction notification, an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" is displayed on the entire surface of the effect display device 9. 2 A normal instruction notification and a first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the characters "Aim at the gate" are provided in a part (upper right part) of the effect display device 9.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and the passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected by 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the instruction notification timer for measuring the period from switching the instruction notification from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S625).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to newly start the display of the right-handed display (small) for prompting the right-handed operation (step S626). In step S626, for example, control is performed to start displaying a small-sized right-handed display at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 201 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S628). In this embodiment, the jackpot end designation command reception flag set in step S628 is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S629), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step S630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S631), the effect control CPU 201 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step S632).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S633), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example). , Background screen of blue display color) (step S634). Further, if the effect display device 9 displays the right-handed display, the effect control CPU 201 controls to erase the right-handed display (step S635). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step S636).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S637), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a low probability / background screen according to the first KT state (for example). , The background screen of the green display color) (step S638). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the right-handed display (small) that prompts the right-handed operation (step S639). In step S639, for example, control is performed to start displaying a small-sized right-handed display at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S640). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability change state flag indicating that it is in the probability change state and the second KT state flag indicating that it is in the second KT state (step S641).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / first KT background designation (step S642), the effect control CPU 201 is the value of the variation counter for measuring the number of executions of the variation display in the high probability / first KT state. Is 51 or more (step S643). The fluctuation number counter is set according to the jackpot type when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C and the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C is completed (see step S9012). If the value of the fluctuation number counter is 51 or more, the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image A (step S644). If the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 51 or more (if it is 50 or less), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter is 31 or more (step S645). If the value of the fluctuation number counter is 31 or more, the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image B (step S646). If the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 31 or more (if it is 30 or less), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the fluctuation counter is 11 or more (step S647). If the value of the fluctuation number counter is 11 or more, the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image C (step S648). If the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 11 or more (if it is 10 or less), the effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to the background image D (step S649).

By executing the processes of steps S643 to S649, in this embodiment, when the high probability / first KT state is controlled, the high probability / second KT state is set (unless a big hit occurs in the middle). The background image A is displayed if the remaining number of times of the variable display until the transition is 70 to 51 times, the background image B is displayed if it is 50 to 31 times, and the background image C is displayed if it is 30 to 11 times. It is displayed, and if it is 10 times or less, the background image D is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the right-handed display (small) that prompts the right-handed operation (step S650). In step S650, for example, control is performed to start displaying a small-sized right-handed display at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag (step S651). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the second KT state flag is reset (step S652).

If the received effect control command is highly accurate / second KT background designation (step S653), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 with a high probability / background screen according to the second KT state (for example). , The background screen of the red display color) (step S654). In addition, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the right-handed display (large) that prompts the right-handed operation (step S655). In step S655, for example, a large-sized right-handed display (a large-sized right-handed display compared to the right-handed display displayed during the first KT state or the big hit game) is displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Controls to start display. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability change state flag and the second KT state flag (step S656). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the first KT state flag is reset (step S657).

If the received effect control command is a full tank error notification designation command (step S658), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game is currently in progress (step S659). Whether or not the jackpot game is currently in progress is confirmed by, for example, whether or not the value of the background symbol process flag, which will be described later, is a value of 4 to 7, which indicates that the jackpot display process to the jackpot end effect process. It can be judged by doing. If the jackpot game is currently in progress, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the full tank error notification (large) (step S660). In step S660, for example, a large-sized character such as "Full tank error!" Is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. If the jackpot game is not currently in progress, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the full tank error notification (small) (step S661). In step S661, for example, characters such as "full tank" are displayed in a small size on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

If the received effect control command is a full tank error release designation command (step S662), the effect control CPU 201 controls to delete the display of the full tank error notification if the effect display device 9 displays the full tank error notification. (Step S663).

If the received effect control command is a large prize opening prize designation command (step S664), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 15 each (one prize to the large prize opening). (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per prize) is added (step S665).

The first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, and is used as a big prize opening in the big hit game that triggered the start of the consecutive villas and all the big hit games that occurred during the consecutive villas. The prize ball based on the winning of the game ball and the prize ball based on the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the probabilistic state in the consecutive villas, the 1st KT state and the 2nd KT state. It will be added at any time. The second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and is a jackpot game that triggered the start of the second KT state and all the jackpot games that occurred during the second KT state. A prize ball based on the winning of the game ball in the large winning opening and a prize ball based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the second KT state are added at any time.

Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas indicating the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas on the effect display device 9, it is based on the value of the first prize ball number counter after the addition. If the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is updated and the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is being displayed on the effect display device 9, the counter for the number of prize balls in the second prize after addition is displayed. The number of prize balls displayed during the special rush is updated based on the value of (step S666).

If the received effect control command is a special prize opening prize designation command (step S667), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball number counter and the second prize ball number counter to 10 (1 to the special prize opening 24), respectively. (Equivalent to the number of prize balls per prize) is added (step S668). Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the number of prize balls displayed during the consecutive villas, the CPU 201 updates the number of prize balls displayed during the consecutive villas based on the value of the first prize ball counter after the addition, and also performs a special rush. If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after the addition (step S669).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S670). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball addition display (for example, character display such as "+10") on the effect display device 9. (Step S671). Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined winning sound from the speaker 27 (step S672), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S673).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the processes of steps S671 to S673.

By executing the processes of steps S670 to S673, in this embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the prize ball addition display is displayed and the winning sound is output. , And the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed, while the special winning opening 24 is not in the second KT state even if the game ball wins, the winning ball addition display is displayed, the winning sound is output, and the special winning opening is displayed. The lighting display of the mouth lamp 24a is not performed.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary to display the prize ball addition display, output the prize sound, and display the lighting of the special prize opening lamp 24a, and it is configured to execute only one or two of these. You may.

If the received effect control command is the first customer waiting demo display specification command (step S674), the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S675). Further, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S676). If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the process returns to step S611. If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 performs the movable member initial operation process for performing the initial operation of the movable member 78. Execute (step S677).

If the received effect control command is the second customer waiting demo display specification command (step S678), the effect control CPU 201 sets the second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer wait demo display specification command has been received. (Step S679). Further, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S680). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process returns to step S611. If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 201 executes the movable member initial operation process (step S681).

In this embodiment, by executing the processes of steps S674 to S681, the movable member initial operation process is executed when the customer waiting demo display designation command is received. When the display designation command is received, the movable member initial operation process is executed on condition that it is in the non-KT state, and when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received, it is movable on condition that it is in the KT state. The member initial operation process is executed.

In the movable member initial operation process of steps S677 and S681, whether or not the movable member 78 is at the origin position by confirming whether or not the effect control CPU 201 has input the detection signal from the origin position sensor 78b. To judge. If the movable member 78 is not at the origin position, the effect control CPU 201 drives the movable member motor 78a to control the movable member 78 to operate (initially operate) to the origin position.

Even when the movable member 78 is in the origin position, the movable member 78 may be operated to return to the origin position again.

Further, when the initial operation of operating the movable member 78 to the origin position fails, the execution of the effect using the movable member 78 is restricted (for example, the movable member 78 is used until the next power-on is performed. It may be configured so that the effect is not executed).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S682). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the processing at the time of receiving the confirmation command. The effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 11 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, so that the stop-displayed symbol is a jackpot symbol. Whether or not it is determined (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to the display result 11 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation. It is determined whether or not it is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol confirmation designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (first KT flag and second KT). If any of the flags is set), the process proceeds to step S4404.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the preparatory display flag indicating that the jackpot preparing display indicating that the jackpot is fluctuating has already been executed is set (step S4402). If it is set, the preparing display flag is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the instruction notification timer (step S4406).

Further, in step S4402, if the preparatory display flag indicating that the preparatory display has been executed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. do. The "preparing display" is an effect that is executed when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state. Specifically, the characters "preparing for the jackpot" are displayed. This is an effect in which the included image is displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case where a still image including the characters "preparing for a big hit" is displayed is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a display in preparation. The display may be configured to correspond to the period up to (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Further, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed if it is in the KT state. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparing display is executed in the normal state, and the preparing display is not executed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process process (step S706) shown in FIG. 42.
First, the effect control CPU 201 performs an instruction notification control process for controlling the instruction notification (step S4501), and performs a demo display control process (step S4502) for controlling the demo display.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 performs any of steps S900 to S908 according to the value of the background symbol process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Background symbol change start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether or not the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, and if the background symbol change start condition is satisfied, the background symbol display unit 9c starts the change. To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background symbol is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed so that the background symbol variation on the left, middle, and right is started. In addition, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined according to the received display result command, and the fluctuation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902).

Background symbol change processing (step S902): The end of the background symbol change time is monitored. When the fluctuation time ends, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol stop processing (step S903).

Background symbol stop processing (step S903): Control is performed to finally stop the fluctuation of the background symbol and display the stopped symbol. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit medium process (step S908). When updating to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904), the jackpot display process (step S904) is performed on condition that the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command is received. Update to the value corresponding to. Further, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908), the value corresponding to the small hit middle display processing (step S908) is set on condition that the small hit start designation command is received. Update.

Big hit display process (step S904): Controls the big hit display. Then, when the big winning opening opening display command (the big winning opening opening display command related to the first round) that indicates that the big hit game has actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( Update to the value corresponding to step S905).

Processing during the round (step S905): Display control during the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is open is received, the number of rounds is displayed and controlled.

Round post-processing (step S906): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the large winning opening is received, which indicates that the large winning opening is open (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S907): Controls the big hit end display after the big hit game is finished. For example, when the ending designation command (first ending designation command, second ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot is received, the ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S908): Display control during the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the instruction notification control process. In the instruction notification control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first instruction notification is in progress (step S4601), and if the first instruction notification is in progress, the value of the instruction notification timer is decremented by 1 (step S4602). ), It is determined whether or not the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If the time-out has occurred (10 seconds have passed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y, S4605 in step S3503), and the first step is made. 1 If the reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S4506).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. Further, when the first normal instruction notification is executed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is executed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When executing the second instruction notification image, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed and displayed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be deleted and the second instruction notification image may be displayed. It may be displayed.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the demo display control process. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if not, proceeds to step S4706. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined to be in the normal state.

Under the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring the value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step S4703). The first demo waiting flag indicating that the first demo display is waiting is set (step S4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step S4705).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first demo waiting flag is set (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). Y), or when the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol (Y in step S4708), the process proceeds to step S4712. As a result, the first demo display is not executed when the first special symbol change is started or the jackpot game state is controlled based on the change of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

When the first demo waiting flag is set, the first special symbol change is not started (N in step S4707), and the jackpot game state is not controlled based on the change in the second special symbol (N in step S4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is subtracted by 1 (step S4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out, the first demo display is started (step S4711) and the first demo standby flag is reset (step S4711). Step S4712).

After that, when the first demo is being displayed (Y in step S4713), the effect control CPU 201 starts changing the first special symbol (Y in step S4714), or is based on the change in the second special symbol. When the game is controlled to the jackpot game state (Y in step S4715), the first demo display ends (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step S4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if any of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the state is KT.

In the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time until the second demo display is started (for example, 30 seconds) (step S4803). The second demo waiting flag indicating that the second demo display is waiting is set (step S4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step S4805).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the second demo waiting flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). If it is not in the Y) or KT state (N in step S4808), the process proceeds to step S4812. As a result, the second demo display is not executed when the second special symbol change is started or the KT state is terminated. Specifically, in step S4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has started. Further, in step S4808, if either the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the second demo waiting flag is set, the second special symbol fluctuation is not started (N in step S4807), and the KT state is not completed (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demo standby timer. Is subtracted by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out, the second demo display is started (step S4811), and the second demo standby flag is reset (step S4812).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 is in the second demo display (Y in step S4813), the change of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or the KT state is finished (step). N) of S4815, the second demo display is terminated (step S4816).

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900). In the background symbol change start waiting process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the change pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step S813). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 201 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step S814). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 07. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901) (step S816).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step S815). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 32. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start processing (step S901) (step S816).

By executing the processes of steps S813 to S816, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state, the variation display of the background symbol is displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the effect display device 9 executes the variable display of the background symbol in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the background pattern is not executed.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation start processing (step S901). In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right background symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols are completely inconsistent are matched. Determine the combination of out-of-reach symbols. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the background symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designated command to the display result 8 designated command or the display result 10 designated command is received (when it is determined that the 9R probable big hit A to C or the 6R probable big hit A to C or the 2R probable big hit) , Determine the combination of symbols with even-numbered background symbols on the left, middle, and right. In addition, when the display result 9 designation command or the display result 11 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot is determined), the same combination as the reach-off symbol in which only the left and right background symbols match. To determine. Further, when the display result 12 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the background symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S921). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a variation display accompanied by reach (step S922). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variation display is accompanied by reach can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern command includes reach. If it is a variable display accompanied by reach, the process proceeds to step S924. If it is not a variation display accompanied by reach, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a variation display that is a small hit (step S923). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display is a small hit can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the received display result designation command is the display result 12 designation command. If it is not a variable display that is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S924. On the other hand, if it is a variable display that is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S930 as it is.

When the variation display is accompanied by reach (Y in step S922) or when the variation display is not a small hit (N in step S923), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to change the right-handed display (large) to the right-handed display (small) (step S924). In step S924, for example, control is performed to change the large-sized right-handed display displayed in the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to the small-sized right-handed display. Then, the process proceeds to step S930.

If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag are set (step S925). If at least one of the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S930. If both the probability change state flag and the first KT state flag are set (that is, if the probability is high / the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 displays on the effect display device 9 according to the value of the fluctuation count counter. Control is performed to reduce and display the displayed items (step S926).

In this embodiment, when the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C and the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C is completed, the display of the number of items corresponding to the jackpot type is started (see step S9013). ). By executing the process of step S926, the item display is gradually reduced and displayed according to the remaining number of fluctuation displays until the transition to the high probability / second KT state in the high probability / first KT state.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is 1 (step S927). If the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 1, the process proceeds to step S930. If the value of the fluctuation count counter is 1 (that is, it is the last fluctuation display in the high probability / first KT state, and the transition to the high probability / second KT state is performed after the end of the current fluctuation display). , The effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is a big hit (step S928). Whether or not the variable display this time is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the received display result specification command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 11 designation command. .. If it is a variable display that is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S930. If it is not a big hit variation display, the effect control CPU 201 selects the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used and the process table according to the second KT state transition effect according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. (Step S929). Then, the process proceeds to step S931.

In this embodiment, when the final variation display in the high probability / first KT state is executed and the variation display is not a big hit, the process table selected in step S929 is followed in step S923,944 described later. By executing the process, the second KT state transition effect suggesting that the transition to the second KT state is performed during the variable display of the background symbol is executed.

In step S930, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the variation pattern of the background symbol to be used according to the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command (step S930). Then, the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in steps S929 and S930 is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S931). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speaker 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S932). For example, the background symbol display unit 9c outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP 209 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S933). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol changing process (step S902) (step S934).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the background symbol changing process (step S902) in the background symbol process process. In the background symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S940) and 1 subtracts the value of the normal symbol variation time timer (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S943). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S944).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the display start timing of the consecutive villa middle prize ball number display during the variable display of the background symbol (step S945). It should be noted that whether or not it is the display start timing of the prize ball number display during the consecutive villas can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the background symbol fluctuation time timer set in step S933 of the background symbol fluctuation start processing. If it is the display start timing of the consecutive villa middle prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the consecutive villa middle prize ball number display on the effect display device 9 based on the current value of the first prize ball number counter. Display (step S946). In this embodiment, the number of special rush prize balls is displayed when the player is in the second KT state (see step S9010 described later), but the prize balls in the consecutive villas in the second KT state are displayed. When the display timing of the number display is reached, the process of step S946 is executed, so that the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas is displayed in addition to the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state has been completed (step S947). Whether or not the second KT state has been completed can be determined, for example, by checking the state of the second KT state flag. If the second KT state is finished, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second KT state, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the jackpot game based on the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the control. (Refer to step S982 described later), when the process of step S948 is executed, the sound output of the music for the second KT is terminated.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas and the display of the number of prize balls in the special rush in the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, the character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but in step S949, the character display such as "during special rush" is also deleted.

Next, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, and when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S950, Y in S951, Y in S952), the jackpot is changed. The preparing display is executed (step S953), and the preparing displayed flag is set (step S954). In step S950, if neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set, it is determined that the state is normal. In step S951, the process during the change of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), and the display result 2 designated command to the display result 5 designated command and the display result 10 for the second decorative symbol are executed. If either the designated command or the display result 11 designated command is stored, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. In step S952, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol has started when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received.

As described above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started while the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is being performed in the normal state, the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forcibly excluded. At that time, the game control microcomputer 560 may send a forced loss designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to be missed to the effect control microcomputer 200. In that case, the effect control may be performed. The microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the forced loss designation command. Alternatively, only when the variation display result is determined to be forced out, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special variation pattern in which the variation display result is determined only by forced error, and the variation pattern showing this special variation pattern. The command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. good.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S955), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation stop process (step S903) (step S965). ).

56 and 57 are flowcharts showing the background symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S903) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol fluctuation stop processing, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set (step S970A). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S974.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S989. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S988. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the effect during the small hit game is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is set. The process proceeds to step S989 without executing the display process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 uses the effect display device 9 to display the stop symbol of the left, middle, and right background symbols (missing symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step S971).

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags (first jackpot start designation command reception flag, second jackpot start designation command reception flag) is set (step S974). .. When any of the jackpot start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set jackpot start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If none of the probability change state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the low probability / non-KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball counter. (Step S980). That is, since it is a case where a big hit occurs in a low probability / non-KT state, it is a case where a so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current jackpot is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot (step S981). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result specification command (display result 2 designation command) that specifies the 16R probability variation jackpot or a display result specification command (display result 10) that specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the specified command) has been received. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game that triggers the start of the second KT state is started. Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 starts the sound output of the music for the second KT from the speaker 27. Control is performed (step S982).

On the other hand, when neither the 16R probability variation jackpot nor the 2R probability variation jackpot is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if it is set (step S983). That is, in this case, if the player is in the second KT state, a jackpot other than the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 2R probability variation jackpot occurs and the second KT state ends, so the second prize ball counter is reset.

Further, if the effect control CPU 201 is set, the fluctuation number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step S984).

After that, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S904) (step S985).

If the jackpot symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (N in step S972), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the fluctuation count counter (step S986). Further, when the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S987), the effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S989). When the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit start designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S990). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the set small hit start designation command reception flag.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step S991). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects the process table according to the small hit medium effect (step S992). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S993), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step S994).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 from the speaker 27 (step S995), and lights and displays the special winning opening lamp 24a (step S996).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S997 without executing the processes of steps S992 to S996. By executing the determination process of step S991, in this embodiment, only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state, the effect during the small hit game is executed, and the special variable winning ball device 22 A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit and displayed when a small hit occurs during the second KT state is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to execute only one of the output of a predetermined opening sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a. Further, for example, even during the second KT state, it may be configured so that neither the output of the predetermined opening sound nor the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a is executed, and the effect during the small hit game is produced in the first place. Or, it may be configured not to execute the small hit medium processing itself.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S908) (step S997).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step S971 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step S972 and N in step S987), the effect control CPU 201 is set to the second KT. It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S998A). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 determines that the right-handed display displayed on the effect display device 9 is the right-handed display (small). Control is performed to change the right-handed display (small) to the right-handed display (large) (step S998B). In step S998B, for example, control is performed to change the small-sized right-handed display displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 to the large-sized right-handed display. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S999).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end effect process (step S907) in the background symbol process process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step S9000). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the round post-processing (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9) follows the contents of the process data n. , Speaker 27, etc.) (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C. Is confirmed (step S9007). Whether or not the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C is determined is, for example, a display result specification command for designating the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C (display result 3 designation command to display result 5 designation command). Alternatively, it can be determined by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 6 designation command to display result 8 designation command) for designating 6R probability variation jackpots A to C is received. If the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C (that is, if the high probability state / first KT state is reached after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is not displayed. The effect display device 9 controls to start the display of the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

If it is neither 9R probability variation jackpot A to C nor 6R probability variation jackpot A to C, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is based on 16R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot). Step S9009). Whether or not it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined by, for example, a display result specification command (display result 2 designation command) that specifies the 16R probability variation jackpot or a display result specification command (display result) that specifies the 2R probability variation jackpot. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the 10 designated command) is received. If it is a 16R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it becomes a high probability state / second KT state after the jackpot game ends), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 if it is not displayed. Control is performed to start the display of the number of prize balls during the special rush based on the second prize ball number counter (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 also controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during special rush".

Although not shown in FIG. 58, if the jackpot game that ends this time is based on a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot (that is, a low probability state / first KT state is reached after the jackpot game ends). If), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "chance time".

Further, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the jackpot game to be completed this time is based on the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C (step S9011). Whether or not the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C is determined is, for example, a display result specification command for designating the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C (display result 3 designation command to display result 5 designation command). Alternatively, it can be determined by confirming whether or not a display result designation command (display result 6 designation command to display result 8 designation command) for designating 6R probability variation jackpots A to C is received. If the 9R probability variation jackpots A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot type in the fluctuation number counter (step S9012). In step S9012, when the 9R probability variation jackpot A or the 6R probability variation jackpot A is set, “30” is set in the fluctuation number counter. If the 9R probability variation jackpot B or the 6R probability variation jackpot B is set, "50" is set in the fluctuation count counter. If the 9R probability variation jackpot C or the 6R probability variation jackpot C is set, "70" is set in the fluctuation count counter.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the number of items displayed according to the jackpot type (step S9013). In step S9013, for example, in the case of 9R probability variation jackpot A or 6R probability variation jackpot A, the display of the item display is started by displaying three predetermined item images on the effect display device 9. Further, for example, in the case of 9R probability variation jackpot B or 6R probability variation jackpot B, the display of the item display is started by displaying five predetermined item images on the effect display device 9. Further, for example, in the case of 9R probability variation jackpot C or 6R probability variation jackpot C, the display of the item display is started by displaying seven predetermined item images on the effect display device 9.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9014).

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a small hit medium process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (step S9201). When the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the small hit end designation command has not been received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). , The process of controlling the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, etc.) according to the contents of the process data n is executed (step S9203). That is, the production corresponding to the small hit game is continuously performed.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, when the second KT state is not in progress, the process table corresponding to the small hit medium effect is not set in the first place (see step S991), so the small hit end designation command is received. Even if it is not done, the production corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

When the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, when the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and step S9207. Move to. Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the background symbol change start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

Next, a display example in the effect display device 9 in the high probability / first KT state will be described. 60 and 61 are explanatory views for explaining a display example in the effect display device 9 in the high probability / first KT state. In FIGS. 60 and 61, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

When 9R probability variation jackpots A to C or 6R probability variation jackpots A to C occur and shift to the high probability / first KT state, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 has a high probability as shown in FIG. 60 (A). / The background screen is changed according to the 1st KT state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, it is assumed that 9R probability variation jackpot C or 6R probability variation jackpot C occurs to shift to the high probability / first KT state, and if the next jackpot does not occur, the fluctuation display is 70 times. It is shown that the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the end of. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is the background image A (the background image corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays in the high probability / first KT state of 70 to 51 times). (See steps S643 and S644). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), as the background image A, for example, a screen showing that the yacht 300 is sailing on the sea and the Asahi 301 rises and is in the morning time zone is displayed. It is shown when it is done.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the right-handed display (small) 302 is displayed on the effect display device 9 based on the first KT state (see step S650). In the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, a case where a small-sized "right-handed" character display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown as the right-handed display (small) 302. There is.

Further, when the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the display of the predetermined item image 303 is also started in the effect display device 9 (see step S9013). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), based on the case where the 9R probability variation jackpot C or the 6R probability variation jackpot C occurs (the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the high probability / first KT state is 70). The case where the display of the item display is started from the state where seven item images 303 are displayed is shown.

Next, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the high probability / first KT state is 50 or less without a big hit, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background image. The background image B (high probability / background image corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations displayed in the first KT state of 50 to 31 times) is changed from A (see steps S645 and S646). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (B), as the background image B, for example, a mode showing that the yacht 300 is sailing on the sea and the sun 304 rises high in the sky and is in the time zone around noon. The case where the screen is displayed is shown.

In addition, the item image 303 is reduced and displayed according to the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the high probability / first KT state (see step S926). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (B), the number of item images 303 is reduced to 5 based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays is 50.

Next, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the high probability / first KT state is 30 or less without a big hit, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background image. The background image C (high probability / background image corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the first KT state of 30 to 11 times) is changed from B (see steps S647 and S648). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (C), as the background image C, for example, a screen showing that the yacht 300 is sailing on the sea and the moon 305 rises to be in the night time zone is displayed. Cases are shown.

In addition, the item image 303 is reduced and displayed according to the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the high probability / first KT state (see step S926). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (C), the number of item images 303 is reduced to 3 based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays is 30.

Next, when the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the high probability / first KT state is 10 or less without a big hit, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a background image. The background image D (high probability / background image in which the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the first KT state corresponds to 10 to 1) is changed from C (see step S649). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (D), as the background image D, for example, a case where the yacht 300 is sailing on the sea and a screen of the mode approaching the island 306 is displayed is shown. There is.

In addition, the item image 303 is reduced and displayed according to the remaining number of fluctuation displays in the high probability / first KT state (see step S926). In the example shown in FIG. 60 (D), the number of item images 303 is reduced to one based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays is 10.

Next, when the final variation display in the high probability / first KT state is reached without the occurrence of a big hit, the second KT state transition effect is executed in the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 61 (E) (see step S929). ). In the example shown in FIG. 61 (E), a predetermined character 307 is displayed on the effect display device 9 as the second KT state transition effect, and a character display 308 such as "special rush transition!" Is displayed as a line of the character 307. It is shown when it is done.

Next, a display example of right-handed display in the high probability / second KT state will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display example of the right-handed display in the high probability / second KT state. In FIG. 62, the display screens transition in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

When controlled to the high probability / second KT state, the right-handed display (large) 309 is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see step S655). In the example shown in FIG. 62 (A), as the right-handed display (large) 309, a case where a large-sized "right-handed!" Character display is displayed at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. There is.

Next, when the fluctuation display with reach or the fluctuation display that does not result in a small hit is executed during the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the right displayed on the effect display device 9. The hit display (large) 309 is changed to the right hit display (small) 310. In the example shown in FIG. 62B, there is a case where the large-sized "right-handed!" Character display is changed to the small-sized "right-handed!" Character display.

Then, when the variable display is ended and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the right-handed display (small) displayed on the effect display device 9 is as shown in FIG. 62 (C). 310 is changed to right-handed display (large) 309 again. In the example shown in FIG. 62C, there is a case where the small-sized "right-handed!" Character display is changed to the large-sized "right-handed!" Character display.

In addition, FIG. 60 and FIG. 61 show a display example of the right-handed display in the high probability / first KT state, and FIG. 62 shows a display example of the right-handed display in the high probability / second KT state, but the big hit game is in progress. In the case or in the low probability / first KT state, the right-handed display (small) is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 60 and 61 (see steps S626 and S639).

Next, a display example of the full tank error notification will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display example of the full tank error notification. When the detection signal from the full tank switch 48 is input and a full tank error is detected, if the jackpot game is currently in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the full tank error notification (large) 313 as shown in FIG. 63 (A). Is displayed (see step S660), and if it is not currently in the jackpot game (if it is not in the jackpot game, whether it is in the KT state or the non-KT state), as shown in FIG. 63 (B). , The full tank error notification (small) 314 is displayed on the effect display device 9 (see step S661). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 63 (A), a predetermined character 311 is displayed based on the fact that the big hit game is in progress, and a character display 312 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a line of the character 311. As the full tank error notification (large) 313, a case where a large-sized character display such as "full tank error!" Is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 63 (B), as the full tank error notification (small) 314, a small size character display such as "full tank" may be displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is shown.

64 and 65 are explanatory views showing a display example of instruction notification according to the present embodiment. In the display example shown in FIG. 64, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol is shown. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (1), the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. 64 (2), the background symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 64 (4).

The second normal instruction notification 55B at this time has the characters "Aim at the gate" and an image showing the game ball passing through the operating gate 17 (the square area through which the game ball passes indicates the operating gate 17. , The square area above it indicates the gate 32).

In the display example shown in FIG. 65, a display example of the instruction notification when a big hit is obtained based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state is shown. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (1), the first demo display is performed because the first special symbol is not changed even in the normal state, and the jackpot fluctuation of the second decorative symbol is performed. Is being done. Then, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 65 (2), the jackpot preparation display is performed and the preparation display flag is set, and then in FIG. 65 (3). As shown, the change of the second special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol. At this time, since the preparing display flag is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed as shown in FIG. 65 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17. The second normal instruction notification 56B is performed as shown in FIG. 65 (5). At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or only the second normal instruction notification 56B is displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A. You may.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and a right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B operates with the characters "aim at the gate". By displaying an image showing a game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball is passing shows an operating gate 17, and a square area above it shows a gate 32). Will be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (6), when the change of the second special symbol is completed in the jackpot symbol without the change of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction is performed as shown in FIG. 65 (7). When the instruction notification 56C is performed and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operating gate 17, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed as shown in FIG. 65 (8).

At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image showing the characters "right-handed". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image showing the characters "Aim at the gate".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot change of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, when the first special symbol is changed, the jackpot preparation is displayed and the change of the first special symbol is performed. When is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (not executed).

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed when the first special symbol is changed. When the first special symbol is not changed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification, which are less visible than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification, are performed.

FIG. 66 is a timing chart when the jackpot gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 66 shows the presence / absence of control of the jackpot game state, the presence / absence of the setting of the high base flag and the KT flag, the presence / absence of execution of the normal symbol variation, the presence / absence of the opening of the variable winning ball device 15, and the presence / absence of the second special symbol. The presence / absence of fluctuation and the presence / absence of opening of the special variable winning ball device 22 are shown for each timing.

For example, while the jackpot game state is controlled (before timing T0 in FIG. 66), the normal symbol has a fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the normal symbol has a fluctuation stop time of 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 1.0 second, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of 2.6 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. While the jackpot game state is controlled, the special symbol is not changed and the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to open.

Further, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 66), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, the fluctuation stop time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the normal symbol hits. In this case, 0.1 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0.2 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and 0.2 seconds, which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol. It is 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of 0.1 seconds, which is the time before the opening of the variable winning ball device 15. Further, the first KT state is 7.0 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state, and 0.8 seconds as the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of a small hit. 1.0 second (assuming that the second reserved storage number ≥ 1) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol after the second time after being controlled to.

At this time, the fluctuation time (7) of the first second special symbol after being controlled to the first KT state rather than the closing period (3.8 seconds) of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the jackpot game state. .0 seconds) is longer. This is because, for example, when the standby before opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is started immediately before the timing T0, it is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds. If the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the first time after being controlled to the first KT state is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 will be controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed. It is conceivable that a game ball wins a special variable winning ball device 22 in spite of being in the first KT state. Therefore, the variation time of the second special symbol is lengthened so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not controlled to be open while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and controlled.

As described above, according to this embodiment, a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a special state is increased, and the special state is the first special state (the first KT state in this example). , The second special state (in this example, the second KT state), which has a higher advantage than the first special state, can be controlled. Further, when controlling to the first special state, it is more difficult for the game medium (game ball in this example) to enter the specific area (special winning opening 24 in this example) than when controlling to the second special state. (In this example, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a high base state and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be long, so that it is difficult to win a prize in the special winning opening 24). .. Further, when the first special state is controlled, the second special state can be controlled based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (30 times, 50 times, or 70 times in this example). (In this example, when the high probability / first KT state is controlled after the jackpot game based on the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C, the jackpot does not occur 30 times or 50 times. , Or, when the fluctuation display of 70 times is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / second KT state). Therefore, the monotonousness of the playability when controlling to a special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952, the playability in the special state is monotonous, and it cannot be said that the interest of the game when the special state is controlled can be sufficiently improved. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the first special state is controlled, the second special state may be controlled based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times. , The monotonousness of the game when controlling to a special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, an approach advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game medium (in this example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult (in this example). Then, a normal variable device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to a closed state is provided, and a variable display of the first identification information (the first special symbol in this example) and a second identification information (in this example) are provided. In this example, the variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed, and the ordinary variable device can be controlled by a plurality of types of control patterns (in this example, as shown in FIG. 15, the variable winning ball device 15 is used. It may be opened for 5.5 seconds or 0.2 seconds). Further, the specific area is usually arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 22 having the special winning opening 24 is arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning ball device 15). 1 Variable display of identification information and variable display of second identification information can be executed at the same time (in this example, variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time). When the special state is controlled, the variable display of the second identification information can be executed with a shorter variable display period as compared with the case where the special state is not controlled (in this example, FIGS. 12 to 14). As shown, in the KT state, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second, 2 seconds, or 5 seconds, which is not selected in the non-KT state, may be selected). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is possible to control the special state at a higher rate than when the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the second special state). It may be determined as a small hit only when the variable display of the symbol is executed), when it is controlled to the first special state, by a higher ratio than when it is controlled to the second special state. The variable device can be normally controlled by a special control pattern for making it difficult for the game medium to flow down to a specific region among a plurality of types of control patterns (in this example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the variable device can be controlled. By opening the variable winning ball device 15 for a long period of 5.5 seconds, it is difficult for the game ball to flow down to the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side). Therefore, it is possible to realize playability in which the degree of advantage of the first special state and the degree of advantage of the second special state are different, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). There are a plurality of types of times (30 times, 50 times, 70 times in this example) as a predetermined number of times. Then, it is possible to control to the second special state based on the execution of the variable display of a different number of times as a predetermined number of times according to the type of the advantageous state (in this example, the 9R probability variation jackpot A and the 6R probability variation jackpot A are obtained. In that case, it shifts to the high probability / second KT state when 30 times of fluctuation display is completed, and when it becomes 9R probability variation jackpot B or 6R probability variation jackpot B, it is high when 50 times of fluctuation display is completed. When the probability / second KT state is reached and the 9R probability variation jackpot C or the 6R probability variation jackpot C is reached, the probability / second KT state is entered when the 70-time fluctuation display is completed). Therefore, when it is controlled in an advantageous state, it is possible to pay attention to the type of a predetermined number of times, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 9R probability variation jackpots A to C and 6R probability variation jackpots A to C) having the same degree of advantage in the advantageous state and different predetermined times. It is controllable. Therefore, when the game is controlled to the advantageous state, not only the degree of advantage in the advantageous state but also a predetermined number of times can be focused on, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

In this embodiment, the number of rounds during the jackpot game is the same as a mode in which the degree of advantage is common, and the game is controlled to the same gaming state after the jackpot game (in this example, the jackpot in 9R probability variation jackpots A to C). The case where the number of rounds during the game is the same 9 rounds, and the number of rounds during the jackpot game is the same 6 rounds in the 6R probability variation jackpots A to C, and both are controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot game) is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the number of rounds during the big hit game may be the same, but the game state after the big hit game may be different between the probabilistic state and the high base state. The number of rounds in the middle may be different, and at least they may have a common degree of advantage.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the first special state is controlled, a suggestion effect suggesting the remaining number of times until the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed is suggested by the effect mode (in this example, FIG. 60). Display of the item image 303 shown in the above) can be executed. Therefore, since the effect mode of the suggestion effect changes depending on the remaining number of times until the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the first special state is controlled, the display mode of the predetermined display can be changed according to the remaining number of times until the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed. Possible (in this example, as shown in FIG. 60, the background images A to D are changed according to the remaining number of times of the variable display). Therefore, since the display mode of the predetermined display changes depending on the remaining number of times until the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed, the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, an approach advantageous state (in this example, an open state) in which a game medium (in this example, a game ball) can enter and an approach disadvantageous state in which the game medium cannot enter or are difficult (in this example). Then, a normal variable device (variable winning ball device 15 in this example) that can be changed to a closed state) is provided, and variable display state control information (KT flag in this example) for controlling variable display is used. Variable display can be executed (in this example, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the KT flag), and the information is different from the variable display state control information and is the normal variable device state control information for controlling the normal variable device. (In this example, the high base flag) can be used to control the normally variable device. Therefore, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the first special state is controlled, a notification effect for notifying that the second special state is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times is performed. (In this example, the second KT state transition effect shown in FIG. 61 (E)) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the notification effect, it is possible to give the player a special feeling of being controlled to the second special state, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control a special state (in this example, a small hit game state) which is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) and which is advantageous for the player. , It is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) with an increased frequency of being controlled to a special state, and as special states, a first special state (first KT state in this example) and the first special state. It is possible to control to the second special state (in this example, the second KT state), which has a higher advantage than the state. Further, when controlling to the first special state, it is more difficult for the game medium (game ball in this example) to enter the specific area (special winning opening 24 in this example) than when controlling to the second special state. (In this example, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a high base state and the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be long, so that it is difficult to win a prize in the special winning opening 24). .. Further, when the second special state is controlled, when the advantageous state is controlled, the second special state can be controlled at a high rate after the advantageous state is finished (in this example, FIG. 33 is shown). As described above, once controlled to the high probability / second KT state, it becomes a probability variation jackpot at a rate of 65% and is controlled to the high probability / second KT state again). Therefore, the monotonousness of the playability when controlling to a special state can be eliminated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952, the playability in the special state is monotonous, and it cannot be said that the interest of the game when the special state is controlled can be sufficiently improved. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the second special state is controlled and the advantageous state is controlled, the second special state is controlled at a high rate after the advantageous state is finished. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game playability when controlling to a special state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). When it is controlled to a specific kind of advantageous state (in this example, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C) when it is controlled to the second special state, the advantage After the state is finished, it is possible to control to the second special state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the 9R probability variation jackpot A to C or the 6R probability variation jackpot A to C is reached in the high probability / second KT state, it is possible to control again. High probability / controlled to 2nd KT state). Therefore, once controlled to the second special state, it becomes easy to be repeatedly controlled to the second special state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the first special state is controlled, a specific kind of advantageous state (in this example, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C) is controlled. In addition, it is possible to control to the first special state after finishing the advantageous state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 33, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C and 6R probability variation jackpot A to C in the high probability / first KT state. Then, when it is controlled to a high probability / first KT state again) and to a special kind of advantageous state (in this example, 16R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot) in the case of controlling to the first special state. In addition, it is possible to control to the second special state after the advantageous state is completed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 33, when the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved in the high probability / first KT state, the probability is high / It is controlled to the second KT state). Therefore, it is possible to give intonation to the game playability, and it is possible to pay attention to the type of advantageous state that occurs when the first special state is controlled, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a probabilistic state (high probability state)) which is easily controlled to an advantageous state, and when the state is controlled to the second special state, a predetermined type When controlled to the advantageous state (6R normal jackpot in this example, 2R normal jackpot), it is possible to control to the first special state which is not controlled to the predetermined state after the advantageous state is finished (in this example, FIG. As shown in 33, when a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot is reached in the high probability / second KT state, the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state). Therefore, it is possible to give anxiety to the player that he / she may be pulled back to a disadvantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, once the high probability / second KT state is controlled, the probability variation jackpot occurs at a rate of 65% and the high probability / second KT state is controlled again. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, when a big hit is made in the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT state may be controlled again at a rate of 100%.

Further, in this embodiment, in the high probability / second KT state, any probability variation jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 9R probability variation jackpot A to C, 6R probability variation jackpot A to C, 2R probability variation jackpot) is obtained. Also showed the case of being controlled to the high probability / second KT state again, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, when a probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / second KT state, there may be a type of probability variation jackpot that is not controlled in the second KT state (controlled in the first KT state or non-KT state).

Further, in this embodiment, when a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) is reached in the high probability / second KT state, the case is returned to the low probability / first KT state. Not limited to this, for example, it may be configured to be pulled back to the non-KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) and the effect control means for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560). In this example, the effect control microcomputer 200) is provided. The game control means stores the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, the first hold storage means (in this example, the first hold storage buffer), and the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information. A special state that includes a second hold storage means (in this example, a second hold storage buffer) that stores as hold storage, and is in a state different from an advantageous state (in this example, a jackpot game state) and is advantageous to the player. (In this example, it is possible to control to a small hit game state), it is possible to control to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to a special state is increased, and information (in this example, effect control). The command) can be output to the effect control means. Further, the effect control means corresponds to the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information depending on whether or not the control is performed in a special state (in this example, the effect identification information (in this example,). Variable display of background design) is possible. Further, the first information (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display designation command) is produced and controlled based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored by the first hold storage means when the variable display of the first identification information is finished. The second information (in this example, the second customer waiting demo display designation is specified based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored by the second hold storage means when the variable display of the second identification information is completed, which can be output to the means. The command) can be output to the effect control means. Therefore, the information regarding the variable display state of the two identification information can be appropriately output to the effect control means.

For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to simultaneously execute a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information, such as the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-156952, the two identification information It is necessary to appropriately output the information regarding the variable display state to the effect control means. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the first information is output to the effect control means based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored by the first hold storage means when the variable display of the first identification information is finished. It is possible, and since the second information can be output to the effect control means based on the fact that there is no hold storage stored by the second hold storage means when the variable display of the second identification information is finished, the two identification information can be output. Information regarding the variable display state of the above can be appropriately output to the effect control means.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the control is performed in a special state to the effect control means. Further, when the effect control means is controlled to a special state, the effect when absent is produced based on the reception of the second information regardless of whether or not the variable display of the first identification information is executed (this). In the example, the display of the second demo display) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the absentee effect at an appropriate timing in the gaming machine configured so that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed at the same time.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the control is performed in a special state to the effect control means. Further, when the effect control means is not controlled to a special state, the effect when absent is produced based on the reception of the first information regardless of whether or not the variable display of the second identification information is executed (this). In the example, the display of the first demo display) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the absentee effect at an appropriate timing in the gaming machine configured so that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed at the same time.

In this embodiment, the case where the first demo display and the second demo display are displayed based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, displaying a predetermined menu guidance image display based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display specification command during the non-KT state, or receiving the second customer waiting demo display specification command during the KT state. A predetermined menu guidance image display may be displayed based on the above. In this case, for example, as a predetermined menu guidance image display, a guidance screen for switching the production mode, adjusting the brightness of the liquid crystal screen or the LED, and adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 27 is displayed. It may be displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the control is performed in a special state to the effect control means. Further, when it is not controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute the variable display of the effect identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the variable display of the first special symbol in the non-KT state). The variable display of the background symbol is executed in response to the above), and when controlled in a special state, the variable display of the effect identification information can be executed in response to the variable display of the second identification information (in this example). , In the KT state, the variable display of the background symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). Further, the effect control means corresponds to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the predetermined identification information having lower visibility than the effect identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol, the second). Variable display of the decorative symbol) can be executed (in this example, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is supported. 2 Execute variable display of special symbols). Therefore, the effect identification information is variably displayed by the variable display of the predetermined identification information while differentiating the identification information of the person who is the target of the variable display of the effect identification information having high visibility depending on whether or not it is controlled to the special state. It is also possible to notify the variable display state of the identification information of the person who is not the target of.

In this embodiment, as the variable display of the predetermined identification information having low visibility, the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 9a provided on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the effect display. Although the case where the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 9b provided on the display screen of the device 9 is executed is executed, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable display of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol may be executed by lighting and displaying an LED or a lamp provided outside the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device).

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output information (in this example, a background designation command) corresponding to whether or not the control is performed in a special state to the effect control means. Further, the effect control means can execute the position detection process of the movable member (in this example, the initial operation process of the movable member). In this case, when the special state is not controlled, the position detection process can be executed based on the reception of the first information regardless of whether or not the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). In this example, the movable member initial operation process is executed when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received in the non-KT state), and the variable display of the first identification information is executed when controlled in the special state. The position detection process can be executed based on the reception of the second information regardless of whether or not the information is set (in this example, in the KT state, the movable member is a movable member when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received. Execute initial operation processing). Therefore, the position detection process of the movable member can be executed at an appropriate timing.

In this embodiment, a case where the background designation command is transmitted in a mode in which the game state can be specified is shown as information corresponding to whether or not the game state is controlled to the special state (see FIG. 17). It is not limited to any aspect. For example, it is configured to send a state specification command for specifying which of the low probability / non-KT state, the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, and the high probability / second KT state. You may.

Further, according to this embodiment, based on the execution of the variable display, a special state (in this example, a small hit) that is different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) and is advantageous to the player. It can be controlled to a special state (game state), and can be controlled to a special state (KT state in this example) in which the frequency of being controlled to the special state is increased. In addition, a launch promotion notification (display of right-handed display in this example) for prompting a launch operation of a game medium (game ball in this example) to a predetermined route (in this example, to the right of the game area 7) is sent. It is feasible. In this case, when the special state is controlled, the launch promotion notification can be executed according to a predetermined mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 62A, at the lower center of the display screen of the effect display device 9). While the variable display is being executed, based on the large size "Right-handed!" Character display) and the variable display period being longer than the specified period (in this example, the variable display is accompanied by reach). It is possible to execute the launch promotion notification in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the large-sized "right-handed!" Character display is changed to the small-sized "right-handed!" Is changed to the character display). Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate launch promotion notification by changing the mode of the launch promotion notification depending on the type of variable display.

For example, in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-086643, the mode of launch promotion notification is uniform when controlled to a special state, and appropriate launch promotion notification cannot always be executed. Specifically, for example, when a variable display accompanied by reach is executed, the variable time is generally long, and even if a right-handed hit is made, it is not possible to immediately expect a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 24, and a small hit is not obtained. Even when the variable display is executed, even if you hit right, you cannot expect to win the big prize opening or the special winning opening 24 immediately. If the launch promotion notification (in this example, the display of the right-handed display) is executed in the same manner and the player continuously performs the right-handed operation, the game ball that has been launched is wasted and the game is played. There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the person will be large. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the special state is controlled, the launch promotion notification can be executed according to a predetermined mode, and the variable display period is variable based on the predetermined period or more. Since the launch promotion notification can be executed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode during the execution of the display, the appropriate launch promotion notification can be executed by changing the mode of the launch promotion notification depending on the type of the variable display. ..

In this embodiment, a case of switching to a small-sized right-handed display is shown as a launch promotion notification according to a specific mode, but not limited to such a mode, the variable display period is a predetermined period or longer. Based on this, the launch promotion notification may be temporarily not performed (for example, the right-handed display may be temporarily erased).

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which it is determined whether or not the variable display period is equal to or longer than a predetermined period by determining whether or not the variable display is accompanied by reach. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, by checking the fluctuation time itself based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command and determining whether or not the fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the launch promotion notification according to a specific mode is used. It may be configured to switch to.

Further, in this embodiment, if the fluctuation display is accompanied by reach, the launch promotion notification (this example) is switched from a predetermined mode (large size in this example) to a specific mode (small size in this example) at the start of the fluctuation. In the example, the case of performing right-handed display) is shown, but the timing of switching is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment. For example, the predetermined mode may be switched to the specific mode at the timing before the reach occurs during the variation display, or the predetermined mode may be switched to the specific mode at the timing after the reach occurs.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the launch promotion notification is executed in a specific mode during the execution of the variable display, a predetermined display result that does not correspond to the operation of the variable device is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Based on this, it is possible to change from a specific mode to a predetermined mode to execute the launch promotion notification (in this example, as shown in FIG. 62C, when the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol. , The small size "Right-handed!" Character display will be changed to the large-sized "Right-handed!" Character display). Therefore, the mode of the launch promotion notification can be changed at an appropriate timing.

Further, according to this embodiment, as special states, a first special state (in this example, a first KT state) and a second special state (in this example, a second special state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It can be controlled to 2KT state). Further, when the first special state is controlled, the launch promotion notification can be executed in a special mode different from the case where the second special state is controlled (in this example, it is shown in FIGS. 60 and 61). In this way, a small-sized "right-handed" character display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9). Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the change in the mode of the launch promotion notification when the second special state is controlled.

Further, according to this embodiment, it corresponds to the case where the variable display period is longer than a predetermined period (in this example, the variable display is accompanied by reach), or the variable display is not controlled to a special state as a display result. Based on the fact that the display result to be displayed is derived and displayed (in this example, it is not a variable display that is a small hit), it is possible to execute the launch promotion notification in a specific mode during the execution of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to execute the launch promotion notification in a specific manner in response to the period when no profit is obtained.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect (reach in this example) is executed, the launch promotion notification can be executed in a specific mode during the execution of the variable display, and the specific mode is more than the predetermined mode. It is possible to execute the launch promotion notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition is low (in this example, as shown in FIG. 62, the right-handed display 310 is changed to a smaller size than the right-handed display (large) 309). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the predetermined effect while urging the player to stop the firing operation.

In this embodiment, a case where a large-sized right-handed display (large) 309 is displayed as a predetermined mode and a small-sized right-handed display 310 is displayed as a specific mode is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the right-handed display is displayed in a relatively conspicuous display color such as red or rainbow as a predetermined mode, and the right-handed display is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color such as blue or green as a specific mode. You may. Further, for example, the right-handed display is displayed in a relatively conspicuous place such as near the center of the display screen as a predetermined mode, and the right-handed display is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous place such as the edge of the display screen as a specific mode. You may. Further, for example, it may be configured to switch between a predetermined mode and a specific mode depending on the presence or absence of animation display. In this case, for example, a right-handed display is displayed as an animation display in which the right-pointing arrow display moves in order as a predetermined mode, and a still image display in which the right-pointing arrow display is stationary as a specific mode. It may be a right-handed display. As such, the right-handed display may be displayed in a predetermined mode in a conspicuous manner, and the right-handed display may be displayed in a less conspicuous manner as a specific mode.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control a state different from the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) and in a special state (in this example, the KT state) which is advantageous for the player. In addition, the specific notification (book) is based on the fact that the number of game media (game balls in this example) stored in the storage unit (surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 in this example) exceeds a predetermined number. In the example, the full tank error notification shown in FIG. 63) can be executed. In this case, when the control is in an advantageous state, the specific notification can be executed according to a predetermined mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), when the big hit game is in progress, the effect display device. (Displays full tank error notification (large) 313 in 9), and when controlled to a special state, the specific notification can be executed in a specific mode in which the recognition degree is lower than the predetermined mode (in this example, FIG. 63 (FIG. 63). As shown in B), when the KT state is in effect, the effect display device 9 displays a full tank error notification (small) 314). Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate specific notification according to the state of the game.

For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-051137, the mode of specific notification is the same depending on whether the machine is controlled in an advantageous state or in a special state, and the specific notification is not necessarily appropriate. Notification cannot be executed. Specifically, as shown in this embodiment, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable to the special state (KT state), the variation display result of the second special symbol may be out of alignment. In some cases, or when multiple nails are provided in the flow path to the special winning opening 24 to make it difficult to win a prize, a certain amount of game balls are stored in the storage section (dish) during the small hit game in a special state. There is a need. However, if a certain amount of game balls are pulled out from the storage unit (dish) according to the specific notification (full tank error notification) under such a situation, it becomes necessary to frequently replenish the game balls in a special state, and the game From a person's point of view, the notification may be inappropriate. In addition, even if the gaming machine does not have a special state (KT state), the number of game balls can continue to decrease from the storage unit (dish) if the jackpot is not won in the high base state. If a certain amount of game balls are removed from the storage unit (dish) according to the full tank error notification), it becomes necessary to frequently replenish the game balls, which may result in inappropriate notification from the player's point of view. be. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, the specific notification can be executed according to the predetermined mode, and when the control is performed in the special state, the recognition degree is higher than that of the predetermined mode. Since the specific notification can be executed in a specific mode with a low value, it is possible to execute an appropriate specific notification according to the state of the game.

In this embodiment, a case where a large-sized full tank error notification is performed as a predetermined mode and a small-sized full tank error notification is performed as a specific mode is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed with a relatively conspicuous display color such as red or rainbow as a predetermined mode, and specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed with a relatively inconspicuous display color such as blue or green as a specific mode. May be configured to do. Further, for example, specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed in a relatively conspicuous place such as near the center of the display screen as a predetermined mode, and specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed in a relatively inconspicuous place such as the edge of the display screen as a specific mode. ) May be performed (in this case, when specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed at the edge of the display screen, etc., at a display location that does not interfere with other effects such as reach effect and advance notice effect. It is desirable to perform specific notification (full tank error notification)). Further, for example, when the main display device and the sub display device are provided as the effect display device (liquid crystal display device), the main display device and the sub display device have a specific notification (full tank error notification) as a predetermined mode. As a specific mode, the specific notification (full tank error notification) may be performed only on the sub display device. Further, as a predetermined mode, a specific notification with a predetermined notification sound output or a loud volume (full tank error notification) is performed, and as a specific mode, a specific notification without a predetermined notification sound output or a low volume (full tank error notification) is performed. May be configured to do. Further, as a predetermined mode, a specific notification (full tank error notification) having a large number of display of a predetermined notification display is performed, and as a specific mode, a specific notification (full tank error notification) having a small number of display of a predetermined notification display is performed. May be good. Further, it may be configured to perform a specific notification (full tank error notification) in which the light emitting mode of the LED or the lamp is different between the predetermined mode and the specific mode. As such, the specific notification (full tank error notification) may be performed in some form in a manner that is easily noticeable as a predetermined mode, and the specific notification (full tank error notification) may be performed in a mode that is inconspicuous as a specific mode.

Further, in this embodiment, the predetermined mode is switched to the specific mode only when the specific notification (full tank error notification) is performed, and the display mode is not switched for other errors. For example, for errors other than full tank errors such as door opening error, ball burnout error, prize ball error, radio wave error, magnetic error, vibration error, and abnormal winning, the display mode is not switched. That is, since these errors are highly important errors and have no meaning of lowering the visibility, they are configured to be displayed in a manner that is always easy to see.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the specific notification in a specific mode even when it is not controlled to the special state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), in the non-KT state. Even if there is, the effect display device 9 displays the full tank error notification (small) 314). Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate specific notification even when the control is not performed in a special state in which profit is difficult to obtain.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, the full tank error notification may be executed in different modes in the KT state and the non-KT state. Further, the full tank error notification may be executed in different modes in the first KT state and the second KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information (first special symbol in this example) and the variable display of the second identification information (second special symbol in this example). , It is possible to control a special state (small hit game state in this example) that is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state in this example) and the special state (KT state in this example) and is advantageous to the player. Is. Further, the special state is a state in which the frequency of being controlled by the special state is increased, and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed at the same time (in this example, the first special state). (The variable display of the symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time), when the special state is controlled, the second is due to a shorter variable display period than when the special state is not controlled. Variable display of identification information can be executed (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, in the KT state, the fluctuation time that is not selected in the non-KT state is 1 second, 2 seconds, 5 seconds. Fluctuation pattern may be selected). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, it is possible to control the special state at a higher rate than when the variable display of the first identification information is executed (in this example, the second special state). It may be determined as a small hit only when the variable display of the symbol is executed). Therefore, it is possible to execute an appropriate specific notification in a special state in which the degree of increase in profit is lower than that in the advantageous state.

In this embodiment, the case where the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is provided in addition to the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 is shown, but the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is provided. Instead, the gaming machine may be configured so that only the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 is provided, and the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 may be provided with an opening for removing balls. That is, the storage unit (in this example, the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3) is the payout passage (in this example, the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3) through which the game medium to be discharged (in this example, the game ball) passes. It is provided between the entrance side passage) and the launch passage (in this example, the exit side passage of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3) through which the game medium to be launched passes, and can be opened and closed by the operation of the player. It may be configured to be provided with an opening (in this example, an opening for removing a ball) for discharging a game medium. According to such a configuration, when the structure is such that a fixed number of storages of the game medium that can be launched cannot be secured when the opening provided in the storage portion is opened, an appropriate specific notification can be executed. ..

In the embodiment shown above, for example, the prize ball number display may be highlighted in the second KT state in which a prize can be expected in the special winning opening 24. Hereinafter, a modified example of highlighting the prize ball number display in the second KT state will be described.

In the embodiment shown above, the first prize ball counter and the second prize ball counter are separately provided, and the number of prize balls in the consecutive villa and the number of prize balls in the second KT state are separately provided. Although the case of counting is shown, in this modified example, a big prize is won during the jackpot game and the KT state regardless of whether the player is in the consecutive villa or the second KT state using only one prize ball counter. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the mouth and the special winning mouth 24 shall be cumulatively counted.

Further, in the present modification, in the first KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed by the first KT pattern on the effect display device 9. For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, in the second KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed by the second KT pattern on the effect display device 9. For example, the prize ball number display is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, during the big hit game, the prize ball number display is displayed by the big hit pattern on the effect display device 9. For example, the prize ball number display is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9.

Further, in this modification, the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) is acquired during the jackpot game or the KT state (first KT state, second KT state) in the effect control main process. The prize ball number display process for controlling the display of the prize ball number display indicating the prize ball number displayed is executed. Further, in this modified example, 15 prize balls are paid out in both the case where one game ball is won in the large winning opening and the case where one game ball is won in the special winning opening 24.

67 to 70 are flowcharts showing the prize ball number display processing in the modified example. In the prize ball number display process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not the large prize opening winning flag is set (step S500). If the big prize opening winning flag is set (that is, if a winning prize has occurred in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 201 resets the big winning opening winning flag (step S501) and wins the first prize. It is confirmed whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S502). If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S506.

If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect has not been executed yet), the effect control CPU 201 will perform the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S503). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S504). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this modification, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game or during the KT state (1st KT state, 2nd KT state), but when the prize ball number display is displayed, the big winning opening or When a game ball wins a prize in the special prize opening 24, a prize ball increase effect is executed in such a manner that the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number display is increased one by one. In this modified example, there are three types of prize ball increase effects: the first prize ball increase effect to the third prize ball increase effect. In the first prize ball increase effect, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the jackpot pattern is displayed during the jackpot game. It is an effect that is executed in such a way as to do. In addition, the second prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively high first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed in the first KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one. In addition, the third prize ball increase effect is the number of prize balls at a relatively low second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) when the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed in the second KT state. Is an effect that is executed in such a manner that is incremented by one.

In this modified example, the fact that the big winning opening winning flag is set (a winning in the big winning opening has occurred) means that the big hit game is in progress and the prize ball number display by the big hit pattern is displayed. Then, in the prize ball number display displayed by the jackpot pattern in step S503, the first prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed is started.

If the big winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the big winning opening), the effect control CPU 201 is set whether or not the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set. Is confirmed (step S505). If the flag for executing the first prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, unless the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S510.

If the first prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S502 or step S505 (that is, if the first prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S506). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S507). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of first prize balls (step S508). Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S509), the first prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S510.

In this modified example, when a prize is won in the big prize opening during the big hit game, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and 15 is immediately added to the prize ball number counter. However, by executing the processes of steps S500 to S509, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example). ), The prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the number of prize balls increases by one. Therefore, in this modified example, it takes 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 seconds to complete the update of the number of prize balls for all 15 prize balls for one prize in the large prize opening. The display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next big prize opening will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, the fifth of the 15 prize balls. Even if a prize is awarded to the next big prize opening at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is performed only up to, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls will continue to increase is displayed. We will continue to execute the first prize ball increase effect until the increase display of all prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case, addition). The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls generated in.) However, in this modification, when the first prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least until the jackpot game is completed. Is configured to end the production that increases the number of all prize balls.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the special winning opening winning flag is set (step S510). If the special winning opening winning flag is set (that is, if winning the special winning opening 24 has occurred), the effect control CPU 201 resets the special winning opening winning flag (step S511), and the second KT It is confirmed whether or not the status flag is set (step S512). If the second KT flag is set (that is, if it is in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S523. If the second KT state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag is set (step S513). If the first KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the process ends as it is. That is, even if a prize is rarely generated in the special winning opening 24 during the non-KT state, since the number of prize balls is not displayed in the first place, the process is terminated as it is without performing the prize ball increase effect.

If the first KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 is executing the second prize ball increase effect indicating that the second prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the flag is set (step S514). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S519.

If the flag for executing the second prize ball increase effect is not set (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect has not been executed yet), the effect control CPU 201 will perform the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 9. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S515). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the second prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S516). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this modification, the fact that the first KT state flag is set (during the first KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the first KT pattern is displayed, so that it is displayed by the first KT pattern in step S515. In the display of the number of prize balls, the second prize ball increase effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (0.1 seconds in this example) is started.

If the special winning opening winning flag is not set (that is, if no winning is generated in the special winning opening 24), the third prize ball increase effect is executed, which indicates that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed. It is confirmed whether or not the middle flag is set (step S517). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the process proceeds to step S533. If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not executed), the effect control CPU 201 is set with the second prize ball increase effect executing flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S518). If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, the second prize ball increase effect is not being executed), the process proceeds to step S540.

If the second prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S514 or step S518 (that is, if the second prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 is awarded in the prize ball number display. It is confirmed whether or not the display for increasing the number of balls by 1 has been completed (that is, whether or not 0.1 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 has started) (step S519). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S520). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize ball at the first speed on the effect display device 9. The effect of increasing the number by 1 is started, and the control is performed to start the second prize ball increase effect (step S521). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball increase effect executing flag ( Step S522), the second prize ball increase production is completed. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this modified example, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the first KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and the prize is immediately awarded. 15 is added to the ball number counter, but when the processing of steps S510 to S522 is executed, the prize ball number display is not immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added, but the first speed (1st speed ( In this example, the prize ball number display is updated in such a manner that the prize ball number increases by 1 in 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in this modified example, 0.1 seconds x 15 = 1.5 seconds until the update of all 15 prize balls is completed for one prize in the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. The prize ball number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the second prize ball increase effect is continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is finished (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 3.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated). However, in this modified example, when the second prize ball increase effect is executed, the first speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively fast at 0.1 seconds, so at least the small hit game is ended. By then, the production that increases the number of all prize balls is configured to be completed.

If the second KT state flag is set in step S512 (that is, during the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the effect effect (step S523). Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect executing flag indicating that the winning effect is being executed is set (step S524). If the winning effect executing flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 sets the value of the winning effect waiting number counter for counting the number of waiting winning effects. 1 is added (step S525). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

If the winning effect executing flag is not set (that is, the winning effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 201 displays the prize ball increase on the effect display device 9 (for example, character display such as "+15"). Is controlled (step S526), and the effect display device 9 is controlled to start the winning effect (step S527). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the winning effect execution flag (step S528). Then, the process proceeds to step S529.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the third prize ball increase effect executing flag indicating that the third prize ball increase effect is being executed is set (step S529). If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is already being executed), the process proceeds to step S533.

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is not set (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is not yet executed), the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the effect display device 9 in the second KT pattern. Control is performed to start the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S530). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed and to start the third prize ball increase effect (step S531). Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the third prize ball increase effect execution flag (step S532). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this modification, the fact that the second KT state flag is set (during the second KT state) means that the prize ball number display by the second KT pattern is displayed, so that it is displayed by the second KT pattern in step S531. In the enlarged display of the number of prize balls, the third prize ball increase effect is started in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

If the third prize ball increase effect executing flag is set in step S517 or step S529 (that is, if the third prize ball increase effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 determines the end timing of the effect effect. It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S533). Whether or not it is the end timing of the effect effect is determined by, for example, when the effect effect is started in step S523, a timer for measuring the effect period of the effect effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the effect effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the effect effect (step S534).

Next, whether or not the effect control CPU 201 has completed the display of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 in the display of the number of prize balls (that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 was started). Whether or not) is confirmed (step S535). If the display for increasing the number of prize balls by 1 is completed in the prize ball number display, the effect control CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 by the prize ball counter. It is confirmed whether or not the state matches with (step S536). If the prize ball number display after the prize ball number is increased by 1 does not yet match the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number counter, the effect control CPU 201 again performs the prize ball at the second speed on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to start the effect of increasing the number by 1 and to start the effect of increasing the number of prize balls (step S537). Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

If the number of prize balls displayed after the number of prize balls is increased by 1 matches the number of prize balls indicated by the number of prize balls counter, the effect control CPU 201 is displayed in the second KT pattern on the effect display device 9. Control is performed to end the enlarged display of the prize ball number display (step S538). Further, the effect control CPU 201 resets the third prize ball increase effect executing flag (step S539), and ends the third prize ball increase effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S540.

In this modified example, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 in the small hit game generated during the second KT state, the payout control of 15 prize balls is immediately performed (see step S30), and the prize is immediately awarded. Although 15 is added to the ball number counter, the prize ball number display is immediately updated to the value to which 15 is added by executing the processes of steps S510, S517, S529 to S532, S535-S359. Instead, the prize ball number display is enlarged and displayed as the effect effect is executed, and the prize ball number increases by 1 at the second speed (0.5 seconds in this example). The number display is updated. Therefore, in this modified example, 0.5 seconds x 15 = 7.5 seconds until the update of the number of all 15 prize balls is completed for one prize in the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state. The prize ball number display will be updated. In this case, it is possible that the next special prize opening 24 will be won before the update of all 15 prize balls is completed. For example, 5 out of 15 prize balls Even if a prize is awarded to the next special winning opening 24 at the stage where the increase display of the number of prize balls is displayed only up to the eyes, the display of the mode in which the number of the next sixth prize balls continues to increase. Is performed, and the third prize ball increase production will be continuously executed until the increase display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls added by the new prize is completed (in this case). , The prize ball number display will be updated over 15.0 seconds including the number of prize balls that were additionally generated).

Here, in this modification, when the third prize ball increase effect is executed, the second speed at which the number of prize balls is updated is relatively slow at 0.5 seconds, so the small hit game ends. In some cases, the production in which the number of all prize balls increases may not be completed. In this modification, the prize ball number display process is configured as an effect executed by the effect control main process, regardless of whether the variable display is being executed, the big hit game, or the small hit game. Since it is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, if the third prize ball increase effect is not completed during the small hit game, the third prize ball increase effect continues over the variable display after the small hit game ends. (Furthermore, the third prize ball increase effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with a variable display in between).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the winning effect execution flag is set (step S540). If the winning effect execution flag is set (that is, if the winning effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect (step S541). Whether or not it is the end timing of the winning effect is determined by, for example, when the winning effect is started in step S527, a timer for measuring the effect period of the winning effect is set, and the timer times out. It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is. If it is the end timing of the winning effect, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to end the winning effect (step S542).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (step S543). If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is not 0 (that is, if there is an unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning effect waiting number counter (step S544). Further, the effect control CPU 201 controls the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball increase display (for example, character display such as “+15”) (step S545), and starts the effect display device 9 to display the prize ball. Control is performed (step S546).

If the value of the winning effect waiting number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no unexecuted waiting winning effect), the effect CPU 201 resets the winning effect executing flag (step S547).

In this modification, when the processing of steps S524 to S528 and S540 to S547 is executed and a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, a prize ball increase display is displayed. The winning production is executed. In this case, a new prize may be generated for the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect, but in such a case, wait until the executing winning effect is completed, and then wait until the winning effect is completed. After the executing prize-winning effect is completed, the next prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed (the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed later).

Here, in this modified example, since the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed with a delay, all the prize-ball increase display and the prize-winning effect are executed by the end of the small hit game. It may not be possible. In this modification, the prize ball number display process is configured as an effect executed by the effect control main process, regardless of whether the variable display is being executed, the big hit game, or the small hit game. Since it is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, if the display of the prize ball increase display or the winning effect is not completed during the small hit game, the prize ball increase display is displayed over the variable display after the small hit game is completed. The display and the prize-winning effect are executed (furthermore, the display of the prize ball increase display and the prize-winning effect may be executed over a plurality of small hit games with the variable display in between).

In this modified example, the effect effect is also executed when the special winning opening 24 is won, but the effect effect is immediately executed at the timing when the special winning opening 24 is won (). See steps S523, S533 and S534).

Further, in this modification, the prize ball number display effect is configured as an effect to be executed in the effect control main process, but the process is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, in the background symbol process process, the processes of steps S900 to S908 are performed. May be configured to execute the prize ball number display effect before executing.

Further, in this modification, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase display is displayed or a prize production is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24. For example, the special prize opening lamp 24a is further lit. It may be configured to be displayed.

Further, in this modification, a case is shown in which a prize ball increase effect is executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the large prize opening or the special prize opening 24, and an effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by 1 is executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a gaming machine configured to be provided with a so-called general winning slot (a winning slot in which a variable winning ball device is not opened even if a prize is won, and only a predetermined number (for example, 5) of winning balls is paid out). In the above, even when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the prize ball increase effect may be executed to execute the effect in which the number of prize balls is increased by one. In this case, when a prize is won in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls is uniformly increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds) in the prize ball increase effect. Alternatively, in the second KT state, even if a prize is entered in the general winning opening, the number of prize balls increases by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the prize ball increase production. You may perform a directing effect. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state), even if a prize is generated in the general winning opening, the prize ball is increased. May be configured not to execute.

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect in this modified example will be described. 71 to 74 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect. Of these, FIG. 71 shows a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game. Further, FIG. 72 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state. Further, FIGS. 73 and 74 show specific examples of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state. In addition, in FIGS. 71 to 74, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), (C) ....

First, with reference to FIG. 71, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the big prize opening during the big hit game will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (A), when the jackpot game is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 400 according to the jackpot pattern, and for example, the character 401 is displayed, and the character 401 is displayed. A case where a character display 402 such as "Big hit!" Is displayed as a dialogue is shown. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 71, the prize ball number display 400 is displayed at the lower left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 400 based on the jackpot pattern. ..

Next, it is assumed that a prize is awarded to the big prize opening during the big hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the first prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S500 to S509). ). In this modified example, in the first prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 71 (C). When all the prize ball number display updates are completed, the first prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a specific example of an effect mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the first KT state will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (A), when the first KT state is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 403 according to the first KT pattern, and when a small hit occurs, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 403. For example, a case where a character display 404 such as "small hit occurs!" Is displayed is shown. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 72, as the prize ball number display 403 according to the first KT pattern, the case where the prize ball number display 403 is displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown. There is.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 72B, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the first speed is executed in the effect display device 9, and the second prize ball increase effect is executed (see steps S510 to S522). ). In this modified example, in the second prize ball increase effect, the prize ball number display is updated at a relatively high speed (0.1 seconds in this example) as the first speed, as shown in FIG. 72 (C). When all the prize ball number display updates are completed, the second prize ball increase effect ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, a specific example of the production mode of the prize ball increase effect executed based on the occurrence of a prize in the special prize opening 24 in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. do. In the example shown in FIG. 73A, when the second KT state is in progress, the effect display device 9 displays the prize ball number display 405 by the second KT pattern, and when a small hit occurs, the prize ball number display 405 is displayed. For example, a case where a character display 406 such as "small hit occurs!" Is displayed is shown. In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the prize ball number display 405 is displayed near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 as the prize ball number display 405 according to the second KT pattern. Has been done.

Next, it is assumed that a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24 during the small hit game. In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523), and the enlarged display of the prize ball number display 405 is started (see step S530). In the example shown in FIG. 73B, a predetermined effect image 407 (for example, an image in a glittering manner) is displayed around the prize ball number display 405 as an effect effect. .. Further, when a prize is generated in the special prize opening 24, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), a prize ball increase display is displayed (see step S526) and a prize effect is started (see step S527). In the example shown in FIG. 73B, there is a case where a predetermined character 408 is displayed as a winning effect and a character display 409 such as "+15" is displayed as a prize ball increase display. Has been done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 73C, the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 1 at the second speed is started in the effect display device 9, and the effect of increasing the number of prize balls by 3 is started (steps S510, S517, S529). (See S539). In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 73 (C) to 74 (H), in the third prize ball increase effect, the second speed is compared with the first prize ball increase effect and the second prize ball increase effect. The prize ball number display is updated at a relatively slow speed (0.5 seconds in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed (the winning effect is continuing), and a new prize is generated in the next special winning opening 24 during the execution of the winning effect. And. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), the effect effect is started in the effect display device 9 (see step S523). However, in this case, since the winning effect is still being executed, the new prize ball increase display and the winning effect are not yet executed.

Next, it is assumed that the effect effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 74 (F), and further, it is assumed that the winning effect has been completed as shown in FIG. 74 (G). Then, when the winning effect is completed, the prize ball increase display is displayed with a delay (see step S526) and the prize is won, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), based on the fact that there is an unexecuted waiting prize effect. The production is started (see step S527).

After that, until the display of all the prize balls including the number of prize balls based on the prize in the special prize opening 24 additionally generated in FIG. 74 (E) is updated, the second prize ball increase effect is performed. Will be executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, as an effect effect, a case is shown in which an effect image 407 with a glittering mode is displayed around the prize ball number display 405, but the effect is limited to such a mode. No. For example, as an effect effect, it may be configured to perform an effect of an aspect that acts on the prize ball number display 405 in some form, such as displaying an image in a mode that covers the prize ball number display 405. By acting on the prize ball number display 405 in this way, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the prize ball number display 405 difficult to see.

Further, in this modified example, a case is shown in which the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added to the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state to display the number of prize balls. Instead, the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately. For example, when a big hit game is in progress, the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed on the lower left portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 71, and the number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The number of prize balls acquired during the first KT state is also displayed at the upper right end of the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second KT is near the center of the display screen of the effect display device 9 in the manner shown in FIG. 73 (A). The number of prize balls acquired during the state may also be displayed (the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state may be displayed separately and independently).

Further, for example, (1) when the KT state ends once and the jackpot game starts, the prize ball number display of the number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is deleted, and the prize ball number display displayed during the jackpot game. (2) The number of prize balls acquired during the KT state is continuously displayed until the KT state is terminated and the non-KT state is entered. It may be configured. According to the aspect (2), it is possible to improve the interest in the game by recognizing the number of prize balls acquired only in the KT state.

Next, the production timing of the production in the small hit game in the second KT state will be described. FIG. 75 is a timing chart for explaining the effect timing of the effect in the small hit game in the second KT state. As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the first prize is generated while the special prize opening 24 is in the open state, the enlarged display of the prize ball number display is started (step S530). (See) The update display of the number of prize balls for the first prize is started, the third prize ball increase effect is started (see steps S510, S517, S529 to S539), and the effect effect is executed (step). See S523). Further, as shown in FIG. 75, the winning effect for the first winning is started (see step S527).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75, in the small hit game in the second KT state, when the second prize is generated while the second prize ball increase effect or the prize effect is being executed, the second prize is awarded. The original effect effect is immediately executed, and the number of prize balls increased by the second prize is taken over, and the third prize ball increase effect is continuously executed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 75, since the winning effect is still being executed when the second prize is generated, the winning effect for the second prize is not immediately executed, as shown in FIG. 75. In addition, after finishing the winning effect for the first prize, the winning effect for the second prize is executed later.

After that, even after the special winning opening 24 (special variable winning ball device 22) is controlled to be closed and the small hit game is completed, the display of all prize balls is updated in the third prize ball increase production. If it is not finished, or if all the winning effects are not finished, as shown in FIG. 75, after the special winning opening 24 is closed, the fluctuation display after the small hit game is finished, and even in the next small hit game, It is possible to continuously execute the third prize ball increase production and the prize-winning production.

According to this modification, the counting display (in this example, the number of winning balls) can be updated and displayed based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 24). The first display mode (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed by the jackpot pattern), and the second display mode (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed by the second KT pattern) that is highlighted more than the first display mode. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 71, in the jackpot pattern during the jackpot game state, the prize ball number display 400 is updated and displayed at the lower left end of the effect display device 9 and is shown in FIG. As shown in 73 and 74, in the second KT pattern in the second KT state, the prize ball number display 405 is enlarged and displayed and the effect image 407 is displayed and updated near the center of the effect display device 9). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of display modes for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

Further, according to this modified example, it is determined whether or not a predetermined opportunity (in this example, a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening 24) has been determined, and it is determined that the predetermined opportunity has been obtained. Therefore, the winning effect (in this example, the winning effect shown in FIGS. 73 and 74) can be executed. In addition, the winning effect can be executed by the first pattern in which the winning effect is immediately executed based on the determination that the predetermined trigger has occurred, and the second pattern in which the winning effect is executed at a timing later than the first pattern. (In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, when a prize is generated in the special winning opening 24, the winning effect is immediately executed unless the winning effect is being executed, and the special winning opening 24 is awarded. If the winning effect is being executed at that time, the winning effect will be executed later). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of timings for executing the winning effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when executing the winning effect.

In addition, according to this modified example, the counting display (in this example, the number of prize balls is displayed) is updated based on a predetermined opportunity (in this example, a game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening or the special winning opening 24). It can be displayed. In addition, the first pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the first period, and the second pattern in which the period until the updated counting result is displayed is the second period longer than the first period. (In this example, when the prize ball number display 400 is displayed in the jackpot pattern, the number of prize balls is increased by 1 at the first speed (for example, 0.1 seconds). When the display is performed and the prize ball number display 405 is displayed in the second KT pattern, the number of prize balls is incremented by 1 at the second speed (for example, 0.5 seconds)). Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of patterns for updating and displaying the counting display, it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the counting display is updated and displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols "1" to "9", a background symbol (effect symbol), and a normal symbol are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. The display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted, but the circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards may be provided with the effect control board of 2.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 is another substrate (for example, FIG. 4). The sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, etc., and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35) shown in the above. A control command may be transmitted so as to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 on the effect control board 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. A microcomputer 200 for effect control that controls the effect display device 9 by executing control related to voice control or lamp control according to the operation, and further changing the received command to the command as it is or, for example, a simplified command. You may send it to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 200 performs display control in response to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment, and similarly, the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is used in which a gaming medium is used as a gaming machine, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize, and is not limited to a gaming ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine that encloses a game medium such as the above and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

Further, in the above embodiment, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown based on the fact that the jackpot type is determined to be probabilistic jackpots. , Not limited to such gaming machines. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the above embodiment to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probabilistic state after completion.

The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st start opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 Variable winning ball device 17 Acting gate 17a Acting gate switch 18c Design hold memory display 20 Special variable winning ball device 22 Special variable winning ball device 23 Bottom member 24 Special winning opening 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 Main board 32 Gate 56 CPU
78 Movable member 80 Production control board 200 Production control microcomputer 201 Production control CPU
560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A special state control means that can control a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
A special state control means capable of controlling a special state with an increased frequency of being controlled by the special state ,
A predetermined state control means capable of controlling a predetermined state that is easily controlled to the advantageous state is provided.
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The special state control means
As the special state, it is possible to control a first special state and a second special state having a higher advantage than the first special state.
In the first special state, the second than special shape on purpose, the game media to a specific area controlled to be difficult approach,
When the second advantageous state is controlled in the predetermined state and the second special state, the state is controlled to the predetermined state and the second special state after the end of the second advantageous state. Being done
When the first advantageous state is controlled in the predetermined state and the second special state, the state that is not the predetermined state and is the first special state after the end of the first advantageous state. Controlled by
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state in the predetermined state and the second special state, the game is controlled to the second advantageous state at a higher rate than the first advantageous state. Machine.

Images